JP6719811B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachi-slot machine”).

Conventionally, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give a big hit based on the fact that a game ball is won at the starting opening, and the symbols are variably displayed on the display device so that the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner according to the lottery result. When the result is a big hit, a gaming machine is known in which a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on a display device to generate a big hit game state.

In addition, a large number of gaming machines have been proposed for controlling the probability change state in which the probability of being selected as a big hit is increased after the end of the big hit game state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-26097, A

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the probability of being a big hit compared to the normal time is increased even if it is controlled to the probability change state after the big hit game state ends, but a big hit is newly won and the big hit game state is executed. Since the game mode until it is executed is the same as the normal time, there is a possibility that the game itself is lacking in fun and, as a result, the enjoyment of the game is reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
First lottery information acquisition means for acquiring first lottery information based on establishment of the first start condition,
Second lottery information acquisition means for acquiring second lottery information based on the establishment of the second starting condition,
Determination means for making a determination based on the first lottery information and the second lottery information,
When it is determined to be a predetermined hit by the determination means, a profit granting state control means capable of controlling to a profit granting state different from the normal game state,
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a symbol changing means for changing the symbol,
Based on the first lottery information or the second lottery information, a symbol variation time determination means for determining a symbol variation time for varying the symbol,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the storage period generating means for generating a storing period the symbol variation time determined based on said first lottery information,
And storing probability improved means for enhancing the establishment potential of the storage conditions than normal in the reservoir period,
Storage means for storing the second lottery information acquired by the second lottery information acquisition means , based on the establishment of the storage condition ,
When the profitable state is controlled based on the second lottery information after the storageable period generated by the storageable period generating means, the storageable period is controlled again after the profitable state ends. equal to an Rukoto.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. FIG. 7A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the AA line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of a door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as seen from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the tray unit as seen from the front left. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the lower left rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site|part of a lower plate in the state which removed the lower plate cover in the cross section of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). Yes, (c) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a different sphere guiding portion is provided. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is a figure and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the production operation unit in a door frame, (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the explanatory view which saw the production operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the EE line in FIG.48(b). 48A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 48B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross section of the production|operation production unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, showing a part of the operation button cut away to hide the portion to be hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is an explanatory view shown, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a portion which is about to be concealed by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a section view of a production operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the external appearance of the production operation unit by the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production operation unit from the direction which the center axis of the operation button has extended. .. 48A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from that of the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 46B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. It is the explanatory view which saw the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button has extended. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the GG line in FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the HH line in FIG.64(b). 64A is a sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 64B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 64A. It is a disassembled perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the second production operation unit for each main member and was seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the second base unit of the second production operation unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub-screen of the screen unit. It is the explanatory view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state of facing forward. 74A is a sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74B. (A) is an attempt to hide the second effect operation unit with the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button in a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is presenting, and (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the sectional view of the 2nd production|operation operation unit of the state of (a). Is. (A) is an attempt to hide the second effect operation unit with the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button in the view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is presenting, and (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the sectional view of the 2nd production|operation operation unit of the state of (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the front, (c) is seen from the back of the door frame left side unit. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the front, (c) is seen from the back of the door frame right side unit. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the MM line in FIG. 82 (a). 82A is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82A, and FIG. 82B is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back. Is. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 88 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line P-P in FIG. 87. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main composition and was seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guide unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the delivery apparatus and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the delivery apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Q-Q in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball removal passage by the ball removal movable piece in a dispensing apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball removal passage by the ball removal movable piece. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit in a payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower tank ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lower tank ball path unit and was seen from back. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state where a taxiway opening/closing door is closed in the lower tank ball path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the taxiway opening/closing door is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a distribution member. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 1st passage. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 2nd passage. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 2nd passage. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the function display unit in the state which attached the game board to the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 120. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals that are input/output to/from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection between a payout control board, which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 120. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the vicinity of a VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control unit. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 8 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 127 to the peripheral control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game. (A) is a flow chart showing the procedure for main processing executed by the main control MPU, and (b) is a flow chart showing the procedure for interrupt processing periodically performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about special design process processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the hit judging processing performed by the main control MPU. (A) is a hit determination table used in the lottery process for winning, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process for types of big hit, (C) is a type of small hit Is a small hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process, about (D) is a table showing the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol change processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 2nd special design stop design setting processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the big hit control processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the small hit control processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the small hit start processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about processing during a small hit performed by main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about gate section passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the universal figure preliminary judgment processing performed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the normal design normal processing which is executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a universal figure hit determination table used in the lottery process for hitting a universal figure, and (B) is a universal figure hit pattern table used in a determination process for the opening pattern when hitting a regular figure. is there. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the normal design fluctuation pattern decision processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a general pattern variation pattern determination table. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design stop processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal electric auditors product opening process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about sub main processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16mS regular processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about production control processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display content of the effect display apparatus in chance mode. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of the effect in the chance mode. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. It is an example of the effect display executed when the game ball is received in the second starting opening during the chance mode by controlling the transition from the normal mode to the chance mode. It is an example of the effect display during the chance mode. It is an example of an effect display during the final battle effect. It is an example of an effect display during the final battle effect.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 which is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine, a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are vertically separated from each other and extend horizontally, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. In addition, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other, and the curtain plate member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door-frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and is operable by the player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320 attached to the lower front surface below the dish unit 320, and the dish unit 320 attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and provided to the player according to the game state that changes when a game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A door operation left side unit 530, which is mounted on the left side of the front surface on the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate operation unit 400 and the operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participation type effect. A door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right side of the front surface on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. And a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a part of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached respectively, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to a front side left surface of the body frame base 600, and a body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame mounted on the right side surface of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, and a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the vehicle.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a box-shaped island facility (not shown), and a game ball inside the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side in front view of the payout unit base 801, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 are paid one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 for paying out and the game balls that are attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the payout device 830 are guided downwards, and the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 in accordance with the storage state of the game balls. The upper full sphere path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full sphere path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 A normal guiding path 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and a game ball discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e to the front side to fill the door frame 3 from the front end. And a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank guiding path 862 for guiding to the tank receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a bass speaker inside the body unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the front view left side of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and housing a power supply board therein, and a speaker unit 920 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of the game balls are housed. And a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a in which the game balls are driven, and places the game balls emitted from the ball emitting device 680 at the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the game balls are moved with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the ball launching device 680. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are received in the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning openings. Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame as seen from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

As shown in the drawing, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated from each other and extends horizontally, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending in the direction. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. In addition, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front frame left end side of the upper frame member 10, and a lock member 66 attached to a lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be attached so as to be openable and closable.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is mounted to the front side of the lower frame member 20. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the left-right center, and a curtain A plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 which are attached to the inner side (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. Is prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.). The upper frame member 10 has engaging notches 11 that vertically penetrate and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 11, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 described later are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting step portions 12 that are recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (eg, wood, plywood, etc.). The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. Is formed to be longer than the width in front of and behind. The lower frame member 20 is provided with engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. In the engagement notch 21, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end cutouts 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces of the left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of extruded shape members of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a mutually symmetrical shape in a plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward on the side surface that is the outer side in the left-right direction between the position rearward from the center in the front-rear direction and the vicinity of the rear end. The recesses 31 and 41, and the protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the recesses 31 and 41 and are hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, inside the protrusions 32 and 42, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily gripped by a worker's finger and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rearward extending portion 51 extending rearward in the shape of a flat plate near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size through which a game ball can pass from the left end of the rearward extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically with a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51, The standing wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and the front surface bulging forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to be directed backward as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. The left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74, which will be described later, of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. And a part 57. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown in the drawings, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern to enhance strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and a rectangular outer fixing portion 61, and a flat plate shape extending forward from a front end of the upper fixing portion 61. Of the front extension portion 62, a bearing groove 63 that extends to the center in the left and right of the front extension portion 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension portion 62, and penetrates vertically, and a top view of the upper fixing portion 61. A plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is. Further, the front extension portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to move the main body frame 4 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 66a extending left and right with a predetermined width in the left and right, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and diagonally forward left, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to the lock member 66 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the hanging portion 65 of the portion 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space for accommodating a main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which will be described later, of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operating portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in the state of being fully threaded. As a result, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands horizontally from a flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A rising flat plate-shaped rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 that vertically penetrates so that only one game ball can pass through. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 has substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extending portion 51 when the outer frame 2 is assembled. However, it is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the projecting portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is configured such that the outer frame lower-side hinge pin 73 is inserted into a lower-body-frame-side lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame-side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 so that the outer frame-side upper hinge The main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance between and is gradually narrowed, rolling is performed to the rear side with a wide interval, and it can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling rearward of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay in the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the same side as the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 in 86. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. The front lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Furthermore, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right lateral fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engaging cutout portions 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surface of the lower frame member 20, respectively. It

[2-9. Outer frame side upper hinge member lock mechanism]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

In the state where the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock main body 66a closes a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V shape, and the tip portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space into which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 of the main frame 4 can be inserted is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

In the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65 and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are diagonally displaced and face each other. It is in a state.

In this normal axial support state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which supports the heavy main body frame 4, is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is pulled out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in the V shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end face of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is exerted. F is a component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arcuate front end face (direction normal to the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a), the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. When the force is divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact surface with the inner surface of one side, and the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment for rotating the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the body frame hinge pin 622 causes the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63 to move. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface and the inner side is retained.

Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is in the normal axial support state or the action force of the main body frame hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c that is generated, and to prevent the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from falling out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a comes into contact with the drooping portion 65 and further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension portion 62.

Even if the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the lock member 66 is positioned such that the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 66 is generated, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension 62.

When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is resisted against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that closed the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is biased by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space in the bearing groove 63 in front of the front end of the lock main body 66 a, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It will be held (locked) in this state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball catching mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting for preventing a game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism in the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed on the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further rearward. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70.

In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the unauthorized tool that abuts the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the return portion 55 causes the leading end of the unauthorized tool. Since it can be folded back further forward, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and a fraudulent act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball is on the outer frame side. When falling onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk that it will be caught between and. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal hole 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass and a left discharge hole 52. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to reduce that the game ball is sandwiched between.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, and the main body frame 4 does not close in a normal state and the outer frame 2 It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being made by forming a gap with the body frame 4.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the back. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. It is a figure. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30, etc., the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 in the shape of a quadrangle, which has a vertically extending outer shape in a front view, and the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a dish unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the dish unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and door frame left side The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating forward and backward in a rectangular shape (quadrangle) whose front view extends vertically. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130 and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable. An upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side and a lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side, a glass unit 190 which is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 which covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate through the door frame base 110 and project forward, and which can be opened and closed, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, are locked. An opening/closing cylinder unit 210 for operating, a ball feeding unit 250 mounted on the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a ball launching device 680 mounted on the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. The foul cover unit 270, which receives the game balls that have been fired by the player and has not reached the game area 5a and discharges them to the lower plate 322, is provided.

Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described later in detail, the player rotates the rotatable handle 302 so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 are moved according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to a lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward, The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 that stores game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is arranged below the upper plate 321 and that is supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the storable lower plate 322, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for removing the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of the cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning a cash or a prepaid card from which a game ball lent from a ball lending machine is returned, and a cash inserted in the ball lending machine. Or a ball lending/returning display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, a production selection left button 331 and a production selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player at the time of presentation, and a lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower dish ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball to the lower side of the dish unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents an effect image to the player. Is something that can be done. Although details will be described later, the effect operation unit 400 has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so that the player can visually recognize the effect image. And a display device 460.

Although the details of the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame left side unit 530 is attached to the left side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 (above the plate unit 320). The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of light emission decoration.

Although the details of the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the front side on the upper side of the dish unit 320 than the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through hole 111 ( The outside right side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes forward more than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decoration lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 emit light.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is mounted on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of left and right upper speakers 573, a top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the center of the front surface, and left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576. The decoration includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580. In the door frame top unit 570, the top middle decoration member 576, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so that the door frame base unit 100 can be opened and closed (the hinge can be rotated). The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached on the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 on the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the outer right front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 and the like, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 that is a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically and penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view of the reinforcing unit 130. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 that are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and a front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decoration substrate 160 mounted on the left side of the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rotatably mounted rear side of the door frame base 110, and a glass unit 190 is detachably mounted. And a glass unit mounting member 170 for.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and has a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300, and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an open/close cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , The upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying the connection between the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner peripheral shape in a front view that is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically. The upper side and the left and right sides of the through-hole 111 forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through holes 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly further forward than the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. And a cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and a recessed portion from the rear surface toward the front near the right end in front view, and the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates back and forth in the cylinder mounting portion 113. Cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 penetrate forward and backward on the left side in a front view. And a ball feeding opening 115 for facing the above.

Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passage opening 116 and the front end of the door frame base 110 are adjacent to the lower side of the through opening 111 near the left end of the front side of the door frame base 110 so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The plate passage opening 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the through opening 111, and the left and right upper sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion opening 119 that penetrates in the front and rear at a corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending along the upper side on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and extending left and right, and a middle reinforcing extending left and right attached on the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 that is attached along the left side in front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcing member that is attached along the right side in front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 via a cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a penetrating forward and backward at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although not shown in detail, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion that is bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The strength and rigidity of the parts are enhanced, while preventing unauthorized entry of external tools such as piano wires and flat-blade screwdrivers.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 includes a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are attached to the door frame base 110 and are vertically separated from each other, and a pair of door frame upper hinge shaft brackets 141 protruding. A columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrates the piece 141a and has an upper end inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The disk-shaped brim member 143 mounted at a position between the two, and the disc-shaped brim member 143 is interposed between the brim member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is provided. And a lock spring 144 that urges the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other. It is formed in a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown in the drawings, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in the horizontal direction at a portion projecting below the lower projecting piece 141a. The bent portion contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

The collar member 143 is an E ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and its upper end abuts on the flange member 143 and its lower end abuts on the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward through the flange member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 has a lower portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 142 that is bent horizontally and is pulled downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144 by an operator. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 may insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pull it out. You can Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 in front view is inserted. The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thereby, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that has a flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a that is attached to the door frame base 110 and extends forward, and in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) that extends upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has an attachment piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape that narrows downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

In this door frame lower hinge member 150, the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, whereby the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 in front view. The door frame left side decoration board 160 extends vertically from a height lower than the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side in front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the vertical center of the through opening 111. The frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. And a substrate 162.

The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light to the front side, respectively. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be made to emit light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 includes a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes in a rod shape from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a projecting portion 172 that is open.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119, and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the projecting portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 and the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base 171, the projecting portion 172 becomes glass. When the glass unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

Since the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located inside the protrusion 172. .. From this, in the state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the projecting portion 172 becomes stable in the state of projecting downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is restricted by the projecting portion 172 when the projecting portion 172 is in the rotational position where the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171, so that the glass unit mounting member 170 is mounted. Even if vibration or the like is applied to the member 170, the entire protruding portion 172 does not rotate so as to project upward from the base portion 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base 171, and the projecting portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved backward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIG. 32, FIG. 33, etc., the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and an outward direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends and a plurality of protrusions that project into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and that are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 ( In this example, three protrusions 183 are provided, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 are provided. ..

The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 of the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side of the tubular portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side of the tubular portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 are aligned with the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be restricted.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle attaching member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle attaching seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the tubular portion The axis line of 181 is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same inclined state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 is a frame-shaped glass frame 191 larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and attachable to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The attachment piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protrusion 172 of the glass unit attachment member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In this glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is detached from the door frame base 110, it can be detached in the reverse order of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and the left and right spaced apart. And a pair of locking pieces 203 projecting forward from the main body 201 and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protruding piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protruding piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear protrusion 202 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear protrusion 202 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state where the rear protrusion 202 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and within the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

In the security cover 200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 201 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and a portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 201 is provided. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component member 1000 described later. Further, in the security cover 200, the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 201 is in a state of protruding rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open/close cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The open/close cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extends in the front-rear direction, and a lock unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and that rotates the key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 that transmits the rotation to the key cylinder 710 of the 700, and a cylinder attachment metal plate 213 that attaches the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130) are provided.

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and the corresponding key is either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at a position facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. By doing so, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape projecting forward in a plan view. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both right and left sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in the direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 has a cylinder lock 211 penetrating from the rear at a position approximately in the vertical center, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate parts 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the mounting plate part 213c on the left side in front view is mounted to the right end part of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate part 213c on the right side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 to the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward while being inserted into 114 and protruding forward of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front side, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launching device 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be supplied to the upper plate ball. By operating the pull-out button 327, the lower plate can be pulled out.

In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b opening below the entrance 251a and having an open rear, and a box having a rear end closed and a front open. The rear cover 252 having the hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying the game ball entering from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launching device 680, the rear cover 252 and the front cover. A ball removing member 253 having a partition portion 253a that is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and that partitions the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b at the rear side of the front cover 251; , The game balls on the partition 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and can be rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. A ball feeding member 254 supported by the ball feeding member 254 and a ball feeding solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feeding member 254 are provided.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 250, the ball feeding member 254 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 251a in a front view, and the ball removing member 253 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 254 and the ball feeding member 254 of the ball feeding member 254. Ball feeding solenoids 255 are arranged on the right side.

The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 includes an arc-shaped slit 251c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball removing port 251b in a front view. The operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball guide path 323f of the dish unit base 323. It is formed so as to close the portion open to the rear on the end side from the rear side.

The ball removing member 253 partitions the space between the entrance 251a and the ball removing opening 251b below the entrance 251a and the partition surface 253a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 254, and the ball of the partition 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up-down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and the lower end rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A pivot rod 253b movably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 253c protruding forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 253b, and a side of the pivot rod 253b below the operating rod 253c. The partition portion 253a and a weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side are provided. The operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34(a)). The operating rod 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 through the ball feeding opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

The ball feeding member 254 includes a blocking portion 254a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the entrance 251a and the partition portion 253a of the ball-removing member 253, and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a. A ball holding portion 254b that is recessed in an arc shape toward the axis of the rotary shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 254c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 is rotated around the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 254 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the partition portion 253a and a ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 252a, and a ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing toward. When the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680, and at the same time, the game ball has entered the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the movement to the ball holding portion 254b (ball hitting supply port 252a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 254a, and the ball stays on the partition portion 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding section 254b faces the partition section 253a, and the end of the ball holding section 254b on the rod section 254c side closes the hitting ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition part 253a is held in the ball holding part 254b.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 250 is moved forward and backward by the movement of the ball feeding solenoid 255, which causes the tip to swing vertically, and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 256 that swings vertically. And a ball feed crank 257 for rotating the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 is provided with an engaging portion 257a which is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side of the engaging portion 257a which engages with the ball feed operating rod 256. A shaft portion 257b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and extends upward from the shaft portion 257b. A transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the member 254 is provided.

This ball feeding unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feeding operating rod 256 which is rocked by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 which moves forward and backward by the ball feeding operating rod 256 and the ball feeding crank 257 to move the ball feeding member 254. It can be rotated. In addition, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state of being located at. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position. In other words, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 254. The game ball received by can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by a firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 682.

Further, the rotatably supported ball removing member 253 of the ball feeding unit 250 receives a moment such that the weight 253d rotates in a counterclockwise direction in front view, but projects forward. Since the operating rod 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that is operated by pressing the upper bowl ball-out button 327 of the dish unit 320, its rotation is restricted, and therefore the ball-out member 253 is normally operated. The partition 253a partitions the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320 downward, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, and the operation transmitting portion 327a moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released by the partition 253a. To be done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball removing guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

The upper dish ball pulling slider 327b having the operation transmitting portion 327a with which the operating rod 253c of the ball punching member 253 contacts is urged upward by the upper dish ball pulling spring 327c. Even if the game balls are vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removing member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing off at the partition 253a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is provided with a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35B and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252, and The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece portion 261 which is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center between a right side and a left side for a predetermined distance. A lower piece portion 262 and an inclined portion 263 each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the opposite sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 are provided. .. The upper piece 261 of the fraud prevention member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260 so that the right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

According to this fraud prevention member 260, a fraudulent game ball attached with a string is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 321 via the ball feeding unit 250 by the ball launching device 680 and is attached to the fraudulent game ball. When an illegal act such as operating a string to move an illegal game ball into and out of the first left starting opening 2002a is performed, due to the momentum of the illegal game ball launched (struck) by the ball launching device 680, The string attached to the illegal game ball is inserted between the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262, and then the V-shape narrowed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 is narrowed. It can be cut by the part that has been opened, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 37(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37(b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

As shown, the foul cover unit 270 is a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and has an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. And 272. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner of the front view, and a through ball that connects the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit 320. The passage 273 and a full-ball receiving port 274 that is open to the rear on the lower right side in a front view of the through-ball passage 273 and is capable of communicating with the lower full-ball guiding path 862 of the lower full-ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And are equipped with.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full tank receiving port 274 when viewed from the front side. A foul ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (foul ball) and a game ball received in the full ball receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 are opened forward in the vicinity of the lower right corner of the front view. And a ball discharge port 276 communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit 320.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272 between the full ball receiving port 274, the foul ball receiving port 275, and the ball discharging port 276, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a wide space, a flat plate-shaped movable piece 278 that forms a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and has a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece. A full tank detection sensor 279 that detects a rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277, and a spring 280 that biases the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

In the foul cover unit 270, when the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the weight of the game balls causes the upper end of the movable piece 278 to move away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, so when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects a full tank, further payout of game balls is stopped, and It is possible to notify the player or a staff member of the game hall to that effect and urge the lower plate 322 to be completely filled.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through ball passage 273, and the guide path opening/closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening/closing contact portion 281 with which the operating protrusion 863e of 863 can abut is provided (see FIG. 112). The door opening/closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves downward as it goes downward. The door opening/closing contact portion 281 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening/closing door 863 comes into contact with the main body frame 4. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening/closing door 863 comes into contact with the door opening/closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening/closing door 863 rotates and the downstream ends of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 (front opening). ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit seen from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 40(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 40(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and is operated by the player so that the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Is.

The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the tubular portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

Further, the handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front side of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302, a handle 302 attached to the front end, and a rotatably attached inner base 304 and the handle base 301 to provide an outer periphery. A handle base 301 and an inner member having a shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306. The handle rotation detection sensor 307 is sandwiched between the base and the base.

Further, the handle unit 300 has one end attached to the handle base 301 and the other end attached to the handle 302 so as to return the handle 302 to an initial rotation position (a rotation end in a counterclockwise direction in a front view). The urging handle return spring 308 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 biased in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip end side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 301 from the left side to the outside in front view. The projecting button 311 is attached to the handle base 301 by detecting the pressing operation of the projecting button 311 which is attached to the handle base 301 rotatably around an axis extending forward and backward behind the inner base 304 and protruding from the inner base 304. The single button operation sensor 312 is provided.

The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 has a cylindrical base portion 301a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at three unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 183 of the tubular portion 181 in the handle mounting member 180. Therefore, the base portion 301a can be inserted into the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 while the three groove portions 301c are aligned with the three protrusions 183, and the protrusions 183 are respectively formed in the three groove portions 301c. When the handle base 301 is inserted, the handle base 301 becomes incapable of rotating relative to the handle mounting member 180.

The handle 302 includes four rotation protrusions (shaft member 305) and four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d that are outwardly separated from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. Two slits 302e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a rear end of the handle return spring 308 are locked so as to project rearward from a position inside the slit 302e with respect to the rotation center. Locking protrusion 302f is provided.

The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first projection 302a has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward. The side surface in the direction of is dented (curved) so that it curves inward. The second protrusion 302b is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 302a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. It projects slightly lower. In the second protrusion 302b, the side surface in the clockwise direction in front view of the most projecting portion swells so as to bulge outward, and the side surface in the opposite direction around the opposite direction curves inward. Thus, it is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

The third protrusion 302c has a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and thus the first protrusion 302a It projects at about half the height. The side surfaces on both sides of the third protrusion 302c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. The fourth projection 302d is such that the most projecting portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most projecting portion of the third projection 302c in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees. It projects slightly higher. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 302d are inclined in a substantially linear shape, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The handle cover 303 is provided with three mounting bosses 303a which are rounded at the center of the front surface and bulge forward and project rearward. The three attachment bosses 303a penetrate the slits 302e of the handle 302 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 penetrates the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end portion of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outer side (open side), so that the handle mounting member 180 is fixed. The handle unit 300 attached via the terminal also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip end inclines toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can perform a rotating operation without feeling uncomfortable.

The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball launching device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are plated with conductive material, and when the player touches the handle 302 or the like, the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is accepted, and the firing solenoid is emitted with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled so that a game ball can be hit. In other words, even if the player tries to hit the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be hit. I can't. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 to play a game by a method different from the original method, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the one-shot button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the one-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the one-shot button 311 and the firing control unit of the payout control board 951 (illustration). Is omitted), the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682 is stopped. With this, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 311, the driving before the one-shot button 311 is operated. With strength, the game ball can be driven again into the game area 5a.

Further, the handle unit 300 is provided with four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and the handle 302 is rotated most clockwise in a front view. The position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit") Since the positions are almost the same, the handle 302 can be maintained in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state for the player by changing the handle 302 by using the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a. It is possible to reduce the player's fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if the player hits the ball to the right in the normal gaming state, it will be difficult to accept the gaming ball in various inlets despite the large consumption of the ball, so There is a disadvantage to the player as compared to the case of hitting.

[3-3. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41A is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as seen from the front right, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the tray unit as seen from the front left. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the upper right rear side, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the lower left rear side. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into main components and seen from behind. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged part of the lower plate in a state where the lower plate cover is removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. The dish unit 320 is attached to a lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400 described later is attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320.

The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 that stores game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is arranged below the upper plate 321 and that is supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. And a lower plate 322 that can be stored.

The plate unit 320 is mounted on the plate-shaped plate unit base 323 that is attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 323, and the left side from the center in the left and right bulges greatly forward. An upper plate body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and a lower plate body 325 forming a lower plate 322 that is attached to the lower left side of the left and right center of the lower front surface of the plate unit base 323 and is bulged forward to form a lower plate 322. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325.

Further, the plate unit 320 includes an upper plate ball removal button 327 mounted on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 such that the upper plate 321 can be pressed from above in a front view right side, and a front view of the upper plate ball removal button 327. A ball lending button 328 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the ball lending button 328, and a ball lending button 328. And the ball lending/returning display portion 330 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and attached to the dish front upper decoration portion 326b on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the upper tray 321. An effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332, and a lower plate ball removal button 333 that is attached to the front of the lower plate 322 so as to project forward from the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 and be press-operable from the front. I have it.

[3-3a. Plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44 and the like. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate body 324, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front bulges largely forward and is opened upward. Has been done. In the upper plate 321 (upper plate body 324), a portion that is approximately 1/3 of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction from the left end to the right bulges to the front. The upper plate 321 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and a guide passage portion 321a is formed whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. There is. The upper plate 321 is inclined such that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 321a is lower on the right end side, and the front end right end side of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) Underneath (see FIG. 44).

The upper plate 321 is in a state of being assembled to the plate unit base 323, and its bottom surface is a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the. As a result, the game balls discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321, and the received game balls can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball delivery port 323d.

As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower downward in the guide passage portion 321a having a narrow depth in the front-rear direction. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 is projected from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls. The upper plate 321 (upper plate body 324) projects into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

In addition, the guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding metal fitting 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and by contacting (rolling) the game ball, it becomes a game ball. It is possible to remove the charged static electricity.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is arranged below the upper plate 321 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game balls, and is attached to the plate unit cover 326 and a lower plate ball removal hole 322a which vertically penetrates the bottom wall portion 325a to allow the game balls to be discharged. And a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the produced operation unit 400 (the second operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the front right corner is recessed rearward in an arc shape.

The lower tray 322 has a lower tray main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are opened, a lower tray cover portion 326k which covers the lower tray main body 325 from the left end side thereof, and the lower tray main body 325 open. The tray unit base 323 is closed at the rear side, and the lower tray cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower tray main body 325 projecting into the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 is exposed to the outside from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 has a trapezoidal shape in which the outer peripheral shape in plan view is a quadrangle that extends to the left and right, and a front side of the quadrangle is the bottom side and an upper side shorter than the bottom side is arranged on the front side. Is formed in a shape that is a combination of and, and the left and right sides of the trapezoid that extend obliquely are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

As shown in FIG. 43, FIG. 44, etc., the lower dish main body 325 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower dish main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral edge excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. And a lower dish ball removal hole 322a that penetrates vertically in a size as large as possible. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is a quadrangle that extends to the left and right, and a front side of the quadrangle is the bottom side, an upper side shorter than the bottom side is arranged on the front side, and the left and right sides that extend obliquely are curved backward. It is formed in a shape that is a combination of a trapezoid and a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 325a) is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position to the right of the center of the lower dish body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a) in the left-right direction. In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portion of the front right corner of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b in front view corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

The lower dish cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the right half above the lower dish body 325. As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, the lower dish cover 340 includes a cover standing wall portion 340a that rises upward from an upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325, and an upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. And a ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 from a part on the front side to the rear end of the right side. The lower dish cover 340 is assembled to the dish unit 320, and the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the dish unit base 323. Further, the front end (left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling portion 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower tray cover portion 326k of the tray unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, a curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and a portion of the rear side wall extending obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

The lower plate 322 is covered with the plate unit cover 326 (rendering operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end in front view of the portion extending to the left and right on the front end side, and half or more of it is viewed in front view. It is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right half goes around behind the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower tray 322 includes a lower tray first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower tray opening 326d of a tray unit cover 326, which will be described later. The lower plate second area A2 (hatched in FIG. 45) located behind the right side of the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). Area), and. In other words, the lower plate 322 has a half or more of a storage region (corresponding to a storage area in plan view, which is a combination of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) capable of storing the game balls, It is located behind the effect operation unit 400. Note that, in FIG. 45, the area indicated by the dotted line hatch is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326.

In the lower tray 322, a lower tray ball supply port 323c forming a rear wall of the tray unit base 323 opens to the right of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the lower tray 322 includes the production operation unit 400, the production operation unit mounting portion 326a (on the right outside of the lower tray opening 326d) of the dish unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. It is arranged in the lower plate second area A2 which is the rear side such as the side. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower dish ball supply port 323c cannot be seen from the player side through the lower dish opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to be hollowed toward the rear of the effect operation unit 400 from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (the plate unit cover 326) which is bulged forward. The storage volume of the game balls is formed to be larger than the area visible from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the lower plate second area A2 is larger than the lower plate first area A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), it is possible to store more game balls in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

As for the lower tray 322, the right half of the lower tray main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower tray second area A2) is, as shown in FIG. ), the lower tray cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower tray main body 325 that protrudes into the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a. This lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second area A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to decrease toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The lower dish ball removal hole 322 a of the lower dish 322 is openably and closably closed by a lid member 334 that operates by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322. Then, by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 333 to open the lid member 334, the game balls in the lower dish 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 320 from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a.

The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is arranged in front of (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c of the dish unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower dish 322. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the effect operation unit 400. It is not visible from the player (front) side.

As described above, the lower tray 322 is formed such that the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid in which the front side is narrowed on the front side of a quadrangle that extends to the left and right, and the bottom surface is the lower tray ball-draining hole 322a. It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward. Therefore, with the lid member 334 opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a opened, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is directly in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward through the opened lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located slightly left of the left end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, when the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the lower dish ball supply hole 322a is supplied. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not flow directly to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Become.

On the other hand, since the right end of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the game is supplied to the lower dish 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. The sphere comes into contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the standing wall on the right side of the lower tray 322. The standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is obliquely curved with respect to the front-back direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, so the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, it is reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without going to a region on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. (See Figure 45).

In this way, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. In the state where is open, without entering the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the area on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322, immediately from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, when the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the player does not see the game balls circulating on the lower dish 322, and thus is dispensed from the upper dish 321 and the dispensing device 830. It is possible to give the illusion that the game balls and the like are directly discharged to the dollar box, and to make it difficult for the game balls to pass through the lower plate 322, thereby making it possible for the player to play the game (game ball driving operation). It is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest by devoting itself to (or directing images, etc.).

Further, since the lower tray 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b, the lower tray 322 is provided. Even if the game ball supplied inside jumps up in the lower plate 322, the game ball can be prevented from entering from the lower plate 322 to the mounting space 326j side, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 is It is possible to prevent contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are abutted or pressed against the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It is possible to prevent the game ball from damaging the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

Further, since the lower plate 322 has the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, when the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a is open, the lower plate ball supply port 323c is discharged. Since the game ball thus made can be directly inserted into the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325. You can Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 is inclined. As it climbs the bottom, the moving speed of the game ball can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 come into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and damage them. Can be difficult.

In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper dish ball removal button 327. With this, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a opens, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed from the lower dish ball. It is discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper bowl ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper bowl 321, the gaming ball of the upper bowl 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower bowl ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is possible to further exert the above-described effects. The simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for ball removal may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 that form the lower plate 322 are separate bodies that can be disassembled, but the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Further, an example is shown in which the cover standing wall portion 340a of the lower tray cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325, but from the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 to the lower tray cover 340. The cover standing wall portion 340a may stand up. Further, although an example in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower tray cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a is shown, the ceiling portion 340b of the lower tray cover 340 does not overlap the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from an upper end.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the relief portion 322b for avoiding contact of the lower plate 322 with the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is provided is shown, but the escape portion 322b is not provided. It may be used as the lower plate 322.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (lower plate body 325, lower plate cover 340, etc.) has a uniform planar shape without a through hole, but a plurality of through holes through which game balls cannot pass. It may have a perforated hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate 322, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It may be formed into a net or a net. In addition, you may make it arrange|position the light-emitting body, such as LED, in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j), and illuminate the inside of the lower tray 322 through the fence-shaped or net-shaped clearance of the lower tray 322 (light emission decoration). ..

In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (the lower plate cover portion 326k) which are separately formed. However, the lower plate 322 may be formed by integrating these four members in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are Integrated plate, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit base 323 integrated, lower plate body 325 and plate unit base 323 integrated, plate unit base 323 and plate unit cover 326 Integrated with lower plate body 325, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit base 323, lower plate body 325, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit cover 326 A lower plate cover 340, a plate unit base 323 and a plate unit cover 326 are integrated, a lower plate body 325, a plate unit base 323 and a plate unit cover 326 are integrated, a lower plate body 325 The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 may be integrated, or the like.

[3-3b-1. Sphere guiding part of lower plate]
In the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320, an embodiment provided with a ball guiding portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. .. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46(b) is a schematic view showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from that in (a). It is a figure and (c) is an explanatory view showing roughly an example provided with a different ball guide part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46(a), the diameter of the lower plate ball-draining hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball-draining hole 322a at the site between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball-draining hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. It is provided with a pair of sphere guiding parts 322c which are spaced apart from each other at a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending in the front-back direction in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the bottom plate 322 is inclined such that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the bottom plate ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is guided to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a by the pair of ball guide parts 322c without getting over the ball guide part 322c, and the lower plate ball It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

Then, in the same manner as described above, the lower plate 322 of this example has a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball on the rear side (lower plate second area A2) on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. The holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the production operation unit 400, the production operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower dish cover 340. It is invisible from the front.

As described above, since the lower dish 322 of this example includes the pair of ball guiding portions 322c, in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without entering the area on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower dish 322. And since the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest. You can

In the example of FIG. 46(a), a rail-shaped one is shown as the ball guiding portion 322c, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Anything that can be guided to the countersunk hole 322a may be used.

Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46(b), the game ball discharged right diagonally forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the wall portion on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. , Is formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and is provided with a buffer portion 322d at the portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer portion 322d is made of rubber, foam, or the like.

Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example also has a lower plate ball-draining hole 322a directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball-draining hole 322a. Is inclined to become. Therefore. The game ball discharged straight forward from the lower dish ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball extracting hole 322a as it is. On the other hand, the game ball discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the front right is reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a by the buffer portion 322d and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. To be done. At this time, the game ball abuts on the buffer 322d and is reflected, so that the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

Further, similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example also has a rear side on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (the effect operation unit 400 in the lower plate second area A2, and the effect operation in the plate unit cover 326). The unit mounting portion 326a and the lower plate cover 340 are disposed on the front end side of the lower plate cover 340 and the like) (behind the covering wall) and are not visible from the front.

In this way, the lower plate 322 of this example is provided with the buffer portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, so that even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The buffer portion 322d allows the sound to be reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without any sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls or the like paid out from the upper plate 321 or the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that it seems that the game balls are also directly discharged to the dollar box. It is possible to make the illusion that the player does not feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, so that the player can concentrate on the game (gaming operation of the game ball, effect image, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest. Can be made.

Subsequently, in the example of the lower tray 322 of FIG. 46(c), the lower tray 322 has a bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) on the opposite side of the lower tray ball supply port 323c with the lower tray ball removal hole 322a interposed therebetween. It is provided with a return portion 322e that projects upward from the game plate and jumps over the lower dish ball removal hole 322a to the side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The return portion 322e may be made of the same material as the material forming the lower tray 322, or may be made of a cushioning material such as rubber or foam that reduces the collision noise during reflection. Further, the return portion 322e may not form the side wall of the lower plate 322, or may form a part of the side wall (main body standing wall part 325b) of the lower plate 322.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line in order from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 is arranged. To the rear on the right side of the opening 326d (on the rear side of the cover operation wall such as the effect operation unit 400 that is the lower plate second area A2, the effect operation unit attachment section 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). It is located and cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, the return plate 322e allows the lower plate ball removal hole 322a side. Can be discharged to the lower part (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the ball tray 322c and the buffer 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. As a result, the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47(a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and FIG. 47(b) schematically shows a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is an explanatory view shown, and (c) is an explanatory view showing a lower plate of (b) with an outline perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at a dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second area A2 as a boundary. The area indicated by the dotted line hatch in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

First, the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47(a) constitutes a part of the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 and has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A and constituting the remaining area of the lower tray second area A2 are provided. The first extension unit 325B is further more than the main body unit 325A, the remaining space of the installation space 326j in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is housed (of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A). It projects into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension part 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. Further, the first extension portion 325B has a relief portion 322b formed at the front right corner for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A.

Next, in the example of FIG. 47(b) and FIG. 47(c), the rear end of the effect operation unit 400 does not project rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and thus the example of FIG. The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is wide. The lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) forms a part of the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 and has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a. It is attached to the right side of the section 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2, and is provided with a second extension section 325C larger than the first extension section 325B. As shown in the figure, the second extension part 325C has a constant width in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger game ball storage area than the first extension part 325B. Further, a lower tray cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension section 325C is attached to the lower tray 322 (see FIG. 47(c)).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension section 325B and the second extension section 325C to the main body section 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls are in a continuous (communication) state, and the storage area of the game balls. Expands. The boundary between the main body 325A and the first extension 325B or the second extension 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first additional portion 325B and the second additional portion 325C in the lower tray body 325 are in a predetermined gap (communication with the mounting space 326j) between the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. Space) is formed.

As described above, in the above example, the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be divisible, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable, so that the game balls in the lower plate 322 are The storage area can be increased or decreased as required. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be dividable, the projection operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 is projected rearward (in the mounting space 326j). An extension unit (first extension unit 325B or second extension unit 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second area A2 that is behind the effect operating unit 400 (second effect operating unit 400A), but the dividing line PL is It may be arranged on the boundary line between the plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2, or may be arranged in the lower plate first area A1.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lower tray body 325 (lower tray 322) is provided with the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the main body portion 325A. A lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the one in which the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower dish main body 325 is shown, but on the right side of the main body portion 325A, the game ball A flat plate-shaped closing member having no storage area may be attached.

Further, in the above embodiment, the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322 has been described, but the lower tray cover 340 can be divided in the same manner as the lower tray body 325, or the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit 325B. You may make it the shape according to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 323 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 below the through hole 111, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is open). It is formed in a shallow box shape.

The dish unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 323a extending cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward under the upper dish ball supply port 323a. And a speaker slit 323b formed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically, and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating forward and backward in a lower part to the left from the left-right center in a front view and extending rearward in a tubular shape, An upper dish ball feed port 323d is provided, which penetrates forward and backward on the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in a front view, extends vertically, and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper dish body 324.

Further, the dish unit base 323, a ball feed guide path 323e for guiding the game ball sent to the rear side of the plate unit base 323 through the upper plate ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, and a ball. After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guiding path 323e, the lower dish ball supply port 323c extends in a substantially L shape so as to become lower toward the right side surface of the cylindrical front view, and from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250. A ball removal guide path 323f for guiding the discharged game ball to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, a left side of the ball feed guide path 323e in a front view, and a lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and an upper end of the ball guide path 323f. An opening 323g that penetrates in the front and rear direction at a position of a height between them and that is in contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and that is operated by the upper bowl ball-pulling button 327 so that the operation transmitting portion 327a projects rearward. , Are provided. The downstream end of the ball removal guide path 323f opens into a cylindrical portion of the lower dish ball supply port 323c.

Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and has a handle insertion opening 323h through which the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a front and rear near the right corner when viewed from the front. And a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the front end thereof opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 321, and the cylindrical rear end thereof is the upper plate passage port of the door frame base 110. 117 is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through-ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. Thereby, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

The lower dish ball supply port 323c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 322 and a cylindrical rear end penetrating the lower plate passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. And is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower dish supply port 323c is arranged behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 (outside the lower plate opening 326d), the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and the like. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325. The dish unit cover 326 has a production operation unit mounting portion 326a to which the center in the left-right direction swells forward and a large opening forward in the center in the left-right direction to which the production operation unit 400 is attached, and on both left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a. A plate front upper decoration portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and a plate front lower decoration portion 326c formed below the left and right plate front upper decoration portions 326b respectively are provided. There is.

The production operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed to have a size in the left-right direction of about 1/3 of the entire width of the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the vertical height of the plate unit 320. Formed at height. Further, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined so that the front end moves backward as it goes upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

The front side of the plate front decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the end of the plate unit cover 326 on the center side and the left and right ends. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape that is slightly bulged forward with respect to the plane connecting the ends of the. Further, the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined such that the lower end thereof moves upward from the center side of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the left and right ends, and the center side of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction ( It is formed such that the vertical direction is narrowed from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side) toward both left and right ends. The plate unit cover 326 has an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 attached to the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the left side in front view.

The plate front lower decorative portion 326c has its front surface moved rearward from the center of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the left and right ends, and the end of the plate unit cover 326 on the center side in the left-right direction and the left and right ends. The curved surface is formed so that the intermediate portion is recessed rearward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions of the.

A lower plate opening 326d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the dish front lower decoration portion 326c on the left side in front view, the lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower dish opening 326d. A lower speaker opening 326e made of punched metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 when assembled in the dish unit 320.

A handle insertion port 326f, which penetrates the front and rear at the lower right corner in the front view, and through which the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, is provided in the dish front lower decorative portion 326c on the right side in the front view. A cylinder insertion port 326g is formed in the vicinity of the right corner in the front and rear direction above the handle insertion port 326f and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open/close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate part 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative part 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate part 326h covers the upper plate 321. It covers the upper right side. An upper plate ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

The dish unit cover 326 includes a plate-shaped bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the dish front lower decoration portion 326c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The bottom plate portion 326i closes the lower side of the dish unit 320. In addition, the bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape such that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from the lower side to the upper side, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, the bottom plate portion 326i is formed with a vertically penetrating hole at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball removing hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

The dish unit cover 326 is provided with a mounting space 326j which is opened forward at a portion of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a and into which the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). The dish unit cover 326 extends rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower dish opening 326d in a flat plate shape, and includes a lower dish cover 326k that covers the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 44). .. The lower plate cover portion 326k is configured such that the left end is in contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b in the lower plate body 325, and the right end is in contact with the left end of the ceiling portion 340b in the lower plate cover 340. There is.

[3-3e. Upper plate ball removal button]
The upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper plate 321 when viewed from the front, and is pressed to move the game balls in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322. It can be pulled out. Although not shown in detail, the upper dish ball removal button 327 is provided with a ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326, so that the rear end side is below the top plate portion 326h. It is mounted rotatably around an axis extending to the. The upper plate ball removing button 327 is in contact with the lower surface of the front end thereof at the upper end of a ball removing lever extending vertically. The ball pulling lever is attached so as to be vertically slidable by a ball pulling base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper plate ball pulling button 327.

The ball removing lever, whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball removing button 327, comes into contact with the upper part of the upper plate ball removing slider 327b which is slidably mounted vertically by the plate unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper dish ball removing slider 327b includes an operation transmitting portion 327a that projects rearward from the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmitting portion 327a extends from the opening 323g in the dish unit base 323. It protrudes rearward so as to face it, and abuts on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 of the ball feeding unit 250 from below. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b is biased upward by an upper plate ball removing spring 327c, and the upper plate ball removing spring 327c biases the upper plate ball removing slider 327b and the ball removing lever. The upper bowl ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

Therefore, when the upper bowl ball removing button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper bowl ball removing spring 327c, the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper bowl removing slider 327b moves downward and the operation transmitting portion 327a moves. Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls in the upper plate 321 are discharged from the ball discharge port 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to the ball discharge guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and discharged to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. (Supplied)

It should be noted that when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked and movable. With this, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a opens, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed from the lower dish ball. It is discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper bowl ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper bowl 321, the gaming ball of the upper bowl 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower bowl ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged into the dollar box, and it is difficult to make the player feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest by devoting himself/herself to the game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.). The simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for ball removal may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball lending button, return button, and ball lending display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display unit 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41. The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending/returning display section 330 are inside the circular decoration on the right side of the upper plate ball removing button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 as shown in the figure. Installed on.

The ball lending button 328 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses the ball lending machine to plate a predetermined number of game balls. It is rented out (dispensed) in the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed with cash or a prepaid card inserted into a ball lending machine, the return button 329 deducts the rented game balls and then returns the cash or the prepaid card.

Although illustration is omitted, the ball lending/returning display unit 330 has a 3-digit 7-segment LED arranged on the lower side of the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, or The error code and the like when the ball lending machine fails are displayed.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown in the drawing, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate unit cover 326 near the right end near the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a on the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side in front view. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex facing left. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex facing rightward of the effect selection left button 331.

The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are displayed to the player on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in a front view. On the other hand, when the effect image prompting the selection is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated within a predetermined time to select a desired option. ..

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower dish ball removal button 333 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower end of the lower dish opening 326d in the dish unit cover 326, which is in front of the lower dish 322, from the lower end of the front surface of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view. By pressing this lower dish ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 322 can be discharged below the dish unit 320.

The lower dish ball removing button 333 can be slid forward and backward by a lower dish ball removing base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 below the lower dish body 325. Installed on. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is arranged to the left of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

The bottom plate ball removal base 335 has a bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326, which is formed at a position below the bottom plate 322 so as to be housed in a stepped portion that is recessed from below to above. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower dish ball punching base 335 is formed with a discharge port 335a vertically penetrating the lower dish ball punching hole 322a at a position directly below the lower dish ball punching hole 322a. .. Although not shown in detail, the lid member 334 is arranged between the lower dish main body 325 and the lower dish ball removing base 335. As a result, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower dish ball removal base 335 is also opened, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a. And are in communication with each other.

Although not shown, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 335 so as to be rotatable around a position to the left of the lower dish ball removal button 333 in plan view. The lower plate ball removing button 333 is connected to a part between the part of the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removing hole 322a and the part that is rotatably attached by the lower plate ball removing base 335. With this, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (the discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

Although not shown in the drawings, the lower plate ball removing base 335 holds the lower plate ball removing button 333 when the lower plate ball removing button 333 is moved rearwardly, and a lower plate ball removing button. And a lower dish ball pulling spring that urges 333 forward. When the lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 rotates. The lower dish ball removing hole 322a is opened by moving the lower dish ball removing hole 322a, and the lower dish ball removing button 333 is held by the holding device and remains moved rearward. In this state, even if the lower plate ball removing button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removing button 333 does not move forward, and the lower plate ball removing hole 322a is maintained in the open state. The game ball in 322 can be discharged below the dish unit 320 through the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

Then, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed rearward, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, when the lower plate ball removing button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removing button 333 moves forward by the urging force of the lower plate ball removing spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. As a result, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thereby, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322.

In addition to the pressing operation of the lower dish ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (the discharge port 335a) is also movable by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be opened. With this, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, only by operating the upper plate ball removing button 327, the lower box 322 can be used for the dollar box. Can be discharged, and the labor required for ball removal can be simplified. The simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for ball removal may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 51 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48(a), and FIG. 52 is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48(b). FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of the portion A in FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and is transparently formed on the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player and the effect operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged rearward of the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having operation buttons 410 and a decorative substrate unit 420 attached to the front surface, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410. And a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter that is slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a material that does not allow light to easily pass therethrough.

The entire button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness. In addition, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness on the front surface side. The button lens 411 extends a predetermined length toward the center side (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a extend axially toward the center side in a state of being recessed from the back surface in an arcuate cross-section at a position on the outer peripheral side and line in the circumferential direction within a predetermined angle range. A plurality of (six) second button decoration parts 411b are provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 toward the center side when assembled to the operation button 410. It extends longer than the center.

Each of the plurality of second button decoration parts 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three second button decoration parts 411b are formed on each of the left and right sides. The second button decoration portion 411b is formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrudes forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the unevenness of the W-shaped cross section and the arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface in the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and is provided with a plurality (six) of frame opening portions 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. Six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, three corresponding to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c that are arranged in a cylindrical shape rearward along the outer circumference of the main body portion 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that are projected rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in the circumferential direction, and penetrate the flange portion 413b back and forth outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a so that the front end side is along the inner surface of the button lens 411. And an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to the (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively arranged at the portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressing detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

Six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, and three base openings 413e correspond to the second button decoration 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the site of the base opening 413e of the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. An inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed inward is substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed, and the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged on the rear side. The display screen of can be viewed from the front. In the operation button 410, the four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is prevented from further moving forward by contacting the front side of the outer peripheral edge with the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438 is restricted. By pressing the switch against, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved rearward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made invisible to the player.

Further, in the operation button 410, the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 is closed by the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is attached by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear can be visually recognized is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer circumference. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420, respectively. It is possible to prevent the base 413 from leaking from the outside to the inside, and at the same time, the operation button left inside decoration board 433, the operation button right inside decoration board 434, the operation button inside decoration board 435, and the operation button below inside the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent light emitted from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from the front side from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decoration substrate 436 from being light-emitted on portions other than the portion that is the object of light-emission decoration, and it is possible to perform light-emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a that is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 that are attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 that is attached to the frame main body 416 from the front side above the central opening 416a. There is.

The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that has a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates forward and backward, and a central opening 416a that penetrates forward and backward on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b that extend in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of and are arranged in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c that is notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Are provided. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on each of the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, three each, and are closed by the frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes an inner cylindrical portion 416d having a substantially cylindrical shape that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c is cut out. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner tubular portion 416d includes the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420. Is located between the first and second LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

Further, the frame main body 416 is provided with a pair of attachment portions 416e that extend outward at the left and right upper portions of the outer periphery and are attached to the performance operation unit attachment portions 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame main body 416 (production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

The frame main body 416 has a metal on substantially the entire surface except a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A plated layer having a luster is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close the outer peripheral openings 416b, which are formed on the left and right of the frame main body 416, respectively, from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed into a smooth surface with no unevenness, and a plurality of unevenness is formed along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so that the frame top lens 418 is fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front surface of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side are provided in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, in the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 includes the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 of the decoration board unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the frame top lens 418 allow light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit as disassembled and seen from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 having an open upper side, an operation button left outer decoration board 422 and an operation button right outer decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side thereof is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side thereof is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421, and on the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the same. The operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decoration board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. A plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. The front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotating shaft, and can rotate the weight 424a to generate vibration.

When the decorative substrate unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the tubular body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the substrate base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 causes only the second button decoration section 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light by the light from the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b can cause only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 to emit light.

Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 and vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the rendering operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit that is disassembled and seen from the rear. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 has the operation button 410 attached so as to be able to move forward and backward, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415.

The base unit 430 includes four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically in the central portion, and a blind hole opened to the front outside the through holes 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a translucent operation button interior decoration member 432 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431 so as to cover the through hole 431a, and extending in the front and rear in a short tubular shape. The operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, and the operation button inner decoration member 432, which are attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432. The operation button upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 in the rear, and the frame top lens attached to the upper front surface of the unit base 431. And a decorative substrate 437.

Further, the base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 that are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Three press detection sensors 440 that are respectively attached to 439 to detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, a production operation unit relay board 441 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and a production operation unit relay board 441. And a relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center, and has a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through hole 431a is sized to fit in the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and has a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted therethrough. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at the upper, lower, left, and right four corners outside the through hole 431a at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The holding holes 431b have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted therein.

More specifically, of the four holding holes 431b, the holding hole 431b on the upper left side is located at the center of the unit base 431 from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. Further, the holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the two upper holding holes 431b. ..

In addition, the unit base 431 has a light shielding wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape between a portion to which the operation button upper decoration substrate 435 is attached and a portion to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 is attached on the upper front surface. Equipped with. The light-shielding wall portion 431c allows the frame top lens 418 to be illuminated and decorated only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the peripheral wall portion 432a having a substantially cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center thereof protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that penetrates the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e projecting rearward from the mounting base 431 and mounted on the unit base 431.

An outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

In the operation button interior decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed into a smooth surface without unevenness.

The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of first button inner decoration portions 432f are provided in the circumferential direction. , Is formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulges in an arc shape, extends in a modified octagonal shape with the center of the front plate portion 432b as the center, and is concentric with the center of the front plate portion 432b as the center. A plurality of second button inner decoration portions 432g (see FIG. 63). The second button inner decoration portion 432g is formed so as to have a portion extending in parallel with four inner peripheral portions of the opening portion 432c.

The operation button interior decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The operation button inner decoration member 432 is not clearly visible behind due to the lens effect of the first button inner decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. ..

The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. The operation button interior decoration member 432 can be made to emit light by emitting light. By illuminating the operation button interior decoration member 432, it is possible to illuminate the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by making these LEDs emit light, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be made to emit light.

The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are full-color LEDs, respectively. It is said that. In addition, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 have white front surfaces. ..

The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 has a rear end abutting on the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b and a front end protruding rearward from the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when assembled to the effect operation unit 400. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation button 410 forward.

The three pressing detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressing detection sensors 440 are, on the front surface of the unit base 431, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, another on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other one on the lower left side. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b via sensor holders 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction with the center of the unit base 431 as the center. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

The production operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 on the left side of the through hole 431a (right side in front view) in rear view. The production operation unit relay board 441 is an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, an operation button lower decoration substrate 436, a frame top lens decoration substrate 437, a pressure detection sensor 440, and a door frame side effect display device 460, and relay the connection with the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. It is a thing.

The relay board cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441 to the left in front view, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 has a lower surface that extends substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3 and is between the bottom plate portion 326i that forms the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. To form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Accordingly, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or tapped downward, the frame unit 415 of the frame unit 415 is not contacted until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the attachment portion 416e, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the performance operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent unreasonable force from acting on 326a and the like, and prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461, and also to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 having a bottomed rectangular tube shape. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16:9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. An outer periphery of the mounting bracket 462 is formed in the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and a bottomed cylindrical bottom portion is attached so as to contact the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

In the state where the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and inside the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button interior decoration member 432. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button interior decoration member 432, and faces the front from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal display device 461 based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state where the operation button is pressed in the cross sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 51. FIG. 62(a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site|part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is about to be concealed by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of a production|operation operation unit. 63A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit in a perspective view as seen from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show an effect image to the player according to a game state that changes when a game ball is hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the operation image. The player can participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410 and entertain the player.

The effect operation unit 400 is formed to have substantially the same height as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Moreover, the overall width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. Are formed. That is, the production operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper portion of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Is installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line, It is inclined so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is placed above the dish unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player drops his line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). As a result, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 and the like in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, respectively, and the operation button spring 438 urges the guide button bosses 413c forward. In the normal state (the state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to move to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with a portion of the rear surface near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the center side (center axis CL side) from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, a portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inner side) of the button frame 412 is It projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the button lens 411 with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for performance provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the central portion is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis line CL is attached so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by a white arrow in FIG. 61, A portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis line CL is pressed.

By the way, since the operation button for the performance in the conventional pachinko machine has a flat surface for the player to press, when the operation button is enlarged with the part to be pressed kept flat. , When pressing a part off the center of the operation button, the pressing surface is inclined so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot move back straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation may not be possible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is dispersed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moving straight backward. You can Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the performance to operate.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be hung. Since it is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, vibration is generated at a portion farthest from the attached portion. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the production operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged immediately below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61) which is relatively easy for the player to press, the player who is pressing the operation button 410 is Strong vibrations can be transmitted to surprise the player and entertain the performance.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326 are formed. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit downward. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment of the plate unit cover 326 are attached. It is possible to avoid applying an unreasonable force to the portion 326a and the like, and prevent damage to the performance operation unit 400 and the like. Therefore, even when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is pressed even if the operation button 410 is pressed or struck with a strong force. Since 400 etc. will not be damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, suppress the decline in the interest of the player, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. Can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed in a flat plate shape because it is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward. Compared with the case, the strength and rigidity are higher, and even when hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, which makes it less likely to be damaged.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, as shown in FIG. 63, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 are formed of transparent members, those The decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button interior decoration portion 432f, the second button interior decoration portion 432g, etc. formed on the back surface is uneven on the front side (player side). ) Is visible. In addition, in the area where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the area where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. With this, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral edge part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is formed between the outer peripheral surface of 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be hard to see. As a result, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.

More specifically, in the effect operation unit 400, the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is defined by the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like on the outer side on the rear side (back side) are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the one-dot chain line is made invisible to the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side and the inner side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are difficult to see and hidden. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation buttons 410, and eventually the effect operation unit 400.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Then, the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. Since they are arranged in concentric circles, the uneven lines of the first button decoration part 411a and the uneven lines of the second button interior decoration part 432g intersect, as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (direction in which the central axis CL extends), so that the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a are separated from each other. With the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a geometrical pattern with a depth and a three-dimensional feel can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. Since the overlapping state of the line and the uneven line of the second button decoration portion 432g changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player and the player can be entertained.

As described above, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button. An upper inner decoration board 435 and an operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are caused to emit light, so that the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inside decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inside decoration substrate 434, the operation button above inside decoration substrate 435, and the operation button below inside decoration substrate 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surface of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis line CL extends, since it is arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. Therefore, only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 includes the operation button left outside decoration board 422 of the operation board unit 420 behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer circumference of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. You can The first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are, as shown in FIG. 52, a cylindrical main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be excellently light-emitting decorated.

Further, in the rendering operation unit 400, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board are provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by making these second LEDs 422b and 423b emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are provided between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is not leaked to the inner side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outer side of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. ..

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the frame top lens decoration board 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of frames are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437. The frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light by making the LED of the above emit light. From the lower side of the unit base 431 of the unit base 431 where the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 is attached, a plate-shaped light shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower rear of the frame top lens 418, Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be excellently illuminated and decorated.

[3-4 g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Performance Operation Unit]
Next, a second effect operation unit 400A that is the second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. FIG. 64(a) is a front view of a second effect operation unit different in the embodiment from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64(a). 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64(b). 69(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64(b), and FIG. 69(b) is an enlarged view of a portion A in (a). FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. It is a figure.

The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. In the following, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as those in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

The second effect operation unit 400A has an outer shape that is circular and has a transparent central part excluding the outer peripheral edge, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and an effect of enclosing the outer periphery of the operation button 410 with the dish unit cover 326. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, and a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. , A second base unit 450 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decorative substrate unit 420 attached to the front surface, and the second base unit 450 visible from the player side through the operation button 410. A door frame side second effect display device 460A mounted on the door frame side and capable of displaying an effect image, and a buffer unit 510 attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A includes a second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A when viewed from the front, and a surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515. And a relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the front surface right side surface of the projector attachment member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outside decoration board 422, an operation button right outside decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a pressing detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, And the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 to relay the connection.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. 72A is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 72B is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. It is a figure. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) such that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 mounted on the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 mounted on the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 are provided. It has substantially the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

A specific difference is that, between the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one apex on the center side of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner circumference of the button frame 412. A truss-like pattern in which a plurality of triangles facing each other and a triangle with one apex facing away from the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction over the entire circumference, and a button lens 411 in the truss-like pattern. Right-angled triangular pattern composed of a bottom side facing the center side of the, a side extending from both ends of the bottom side toward the center side of the button lens 411, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side toward the center of the bottom side. And a hypotenuse of a right triangle, a side extending from the center of the bottom of the truss triangle to the center of the button lens 411 longer than the right triangle, and a right triangle from the tip of the side. And a variable isosceles triangular shape composed of a side extending to the tip of the oblique side of the pattern.

That is, this first button decoration portion 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although illustration is omitted, the triangles forming the first button decoration portion 411a are formed in a polyhedron shape with their respective faces facing different directions. As a result, the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, while the back surface side is formed in a polyhedron shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, and thus the first button decoration portion 411a. In this area, the plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes intricately, and light passing through this area is irregularly refracted. Therefore, in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, the geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to the irregular refraction.

The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape whose rear is open. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the tubular shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to move forward and backward by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 that is inserted into the guide boss portion 413c from the rear side.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71, and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated. The second effect operation unit 400A can be given vibration.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 having an open upper side, an operation button left outer decoration board 422 and an operation button right outer decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front. In the second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to move forward and backward, the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached, and it is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is what is done.

The second base unit 450 has a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and a rear portion in the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, which projects from the front surface of the unit base 451. Four columnar button shafts 452 slidably inserted from each other, and an operation button spring that inserts each of the four button shafts 452 and urges the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (Not shown), and three pressing detection sensors 454 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 451 and respectively detecting the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410.

The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b protruding rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a in a hemispherical shape, and a vertical direction with respect to the front surface of the main body 451a. When viewed, it has a substantially rectangular shape that extends vertically and penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth, a through hole 451c, four holding holes 451d recessed rearward from the front surface of the main body portion 451a, and a main body portion 451a. The upper bearing portion 451e that is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front surface to the rear portion in the upper part of the body and the semicircular shape that is coaxial with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front surface to the rear portion in the lower portion of the main body portion 451a. A lower bearing portion 451f recessed in a (U-shape) and a pair of rotation regulating portions 451g formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a to regulate the rotation of the screen unit 470. And are equipped with.

The annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner circumference and an outer circumference that are substantially the same size as the board base 421 of the decorative board unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without coming into contact with the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A that is rotatably attached by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f. There is. The through hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass from the rear side.

The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at the four corners of the front, bottom, left and right of the front surface of the main body 451a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The holding holes 451d are formed such that the inner diameter thereof is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted therein. A button shaft 452 is mounted in the four holding holes 451d coaxially with the central axis thereof. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d projects forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. The button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d is inserted into the tubular guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, so that the operation button 410 is slidably attached in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. You can

The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d extends counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated by about 30 degrees in the direction. Further, the holding hole 451d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. ..

In addition, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively, and the front ends of these operation button springs come into contact with the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413c, so that the operation button springs are pressed through the guide boss portions 413c. 410 is biased forward.

The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U shape in which the front is open and the rear extends. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions extending in the semi-arc shape are located coaxially. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474A of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are inserted from the front, and the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. By being attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

The front surface of each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 passes through the central axis of a semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (surface) is recessed rearward in a U shape. Are formed so as to be separated from each other in the circumferential direction by a predetermined angle about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g restrict the rotation range of the screen unit 470 when the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 abuts in a state of being assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. There is. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to the angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restriction parts 451g.

Although not shown in the drawings, magnets are embedded in the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and the magnets are magnetically attached to the iron plates attached to the stoppers 475b so as to contact the rotation restricting portions 451g. It is difficult for the stopper 475b that has been moved to be separated from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, in the screen unit 470, the main position of the main screen 471 is in the first position with the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b, or the second position with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in any one of the position states, and the movement of the screen unit 470 that is about to rotate is suppressed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration of the vibration motor 424, etc. The effect image produced by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

The three press detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressing detection sensors 454 remain on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressing detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction with the center of the unit base 451 as the center. These three press detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 mounted rotatably around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base. An upper bearing member 480 attached to the upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and an upper bearing member 480 attached to the lower front surface of the second base unit 450. And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

In addition, the door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a rotary drive unit 490 that is rotationally driven to rotate the screen unit 470 and is attached to the upper portion of the second base unit 450, and a cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 that is arranged and is capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, the projector 500 is attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. And a box-shaped projector mounting member 505 whose front is open, and a driving unit 475 of the screen unit 470 mounted on the second base unit 450 so as to cover the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 on the left side in a front view. The upper cover 506 is provided with two rotation detection sensors 507 attached to the upper cover 506 and detecting the rotation position (rotation position) of the screen unit 470.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 about an axis extending vertically, and by projecting an effect image from the projector 500, The effect image can be displayed (projection display) so as to be visually recognized by the player.

The screen unit 470 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape and has a milky white and translucent main screen 471, and a disk shape in which one end side in the axial direction of the main screen 471 is a part of the outer periphery and the central portion is an axis. A sub-screen 472 that is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, has a milky white color, and has a light-transmitting property, and has a cylindrical shape that protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, an operating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half of the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decorative member 476 (see FIG. 74, FIG. 75, etc.) that is transparent and is formed in a relief pattern imitating a predetermined character (skull), and the sub-screen 472 attached to the back surface side of the sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decorative substrate 477 (see FIG. 75, etc.) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the main screen 471 and a main screen 471 from the end opposite to the sub-screen 472 toward the central axis of the main screen 471. And a semicircular arc-shaped peripheral decoration member 478 that extends in a short length.

The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 is formed such that its axial length is about 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. Both ends in the axial direction of the main screen 471 are decorated so as to be framed by the peripheral decoration portion 472 a of the sub-screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which its central axis extends (see FIG. 74(b)). .. The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer circumference to the center side and closes the inner periphery of the peripheral decoration portion 472a in which a plurality of pyramidal pyramidal irregularities are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. A curved screen portion 472b that has a curved surface. The peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side thereof projects in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in the direction away from the main screen 471. A through hole is formed in the screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472, and a sub screen decoration member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are rotatably attached by being inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, respectively.

The actuating gear member 475 meshes with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotary drive unit 490 and is formed to extend outward from one end of the gear tooth 475a that is formed over substantially a half circumference and one end of the gear tooth 475a in the circumferential direction. The stopper 475b and the detection piece 475c projecting outward from the opposite side of the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a in a plate shape. The stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 is located in the recess 481a of the upper bearing member 480 that is recessed in an arc shape around the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in a state of being assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is regulated by coming into contact with the pair of rotation regulating portions 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends of the recess 481a.

Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It is like this.

The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by the rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

The sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decoration member 476 is formed of a transparent member in a relief shape imitating a skull, and since the plate thickness thereof is changed intricately, the transmitted light is complicatedly refracted and the rear side is visually recognized. It's getting harder. Although not shown in detail, the sub-screen decoration member 476 has a letter "PUSH" formed in a relief imitating a skull.

The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the back surface side of the sub-screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 and the front surface side (the side facing the sub-screen 472) and the plurality of LEDs 477a. Has been implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than that of the sub-screen decoration member 476, and has a white surface. By making the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light. More specifically, by causing the LED 477a to emit light, the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can strongly light and decorate the "eye" portion and the "PUSH" portion of the skull.

Further, since the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is arranged relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not include a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 and the sub-screen 472, the LED 477a emits light. , The point light source of the LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Further, the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can be projected on the sub-screen 472 by the projector 500.

The peripheral decoration member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and like the peripheral decoration portion 472a, quadrangular pyramid-shaped irregularities are provided in a plurality of rows in the circumferential direction of the arc. ..

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f that are open to the front in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so that the main body portion of the unit base 451 is closed. It is attached to the front surface of 451a. Further, the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are in a state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted into the upper bearing part 451e and the lower bearing part 451f of the unit base 451, respectively, from the front. By mounting on the front surface of the unit base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably mounted on the second base unit 450.

The upper bearing member 480 is a bearing member 481 attached to the upper part of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing part 451e whose front side is open. And a frame top lens decorative substrate 482 attached to the front surface of the upper portion of the frame 481. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface toward the front so that the center in the left-right direction is deepest. The recess 481a of the bearing member 481 of the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 when assembled in the second rendering operation unit 400A, and has a screen inside. The stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The recessed portion 481a recessed in an arc shape allows the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 to rotate favorably between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface side of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480, and the LED is mounted behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in the state assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. As a result, the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light.

The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the lower bearing portion 451f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 by inserting the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. Can be rotatably mounted.

[3-4g-5c. Rotational drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and having a hollow interior, and a switching drive motor 492 mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and having a rotation shaft protruding into the unit case 491. , A spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotary shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear meshing with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A transmission gear (not shown) is meshed with the first transmission gear, is meshable with gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. And a second transmission gear 495 having a spur gear shape.

In the rotary drive unit 490 assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A, the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen drive unit, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending in the front-back direction. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector 500 is arranged in the hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

The projector 500 includes a cube-shaped projector main body 501 that is mounted on the projector mounting member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector main body 501 in a cylindrical shape and irradiates a production image forward from the front end.

In this projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are arranged inside the cover portion 451b by passing through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Mounted as.

The projector 500 can project the effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and has the projector 500 mounted therein and the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector mounting member 505 can be mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 to cover the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, and the projector 500 can be mounted in a state of being tilted so as to match the tilt of the operation button 410. .. A plurality of slits 505a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and heat emitted from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

A second effect operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 when viewed from the front.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to cover the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 so as to be separated from each other.

Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions that are separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and are the operating gears in the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are a detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position where the main screen 471 faces the front, and a second position where the sub screen 472 faces the front. The detection piece 475c at the time can be detected. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c from these two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and absorbs the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, and the plate unit cover in the plate unit 320. It is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of 326.

The cushioning unit 510 is in contact with the elastically deformable plate-like cushioning member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the cushioning member 511. The buffer base 512 is mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

The cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a that comes into contact with the lower surface of the cushioning member 511, and leg pieces that project downward from both left and right sides of the main body portion 512a in a front view and extend in the front-rear direction. And 512b. The leg pieces 512b of the buffer base 512 are in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the state assembled to the door frame 3.

In this buffer unit 510, the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 of the buffer unit 510 when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit down. Move down to. The shock is absorbed by compressing the buffer member 511. When the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 comes into contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the buffer base 512. Since a gap is formed between the body portion 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 by the left and right leg pieces 512b, the projector mounting member abutting on the upper surface side of the body portion 512a. When 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a bends, and the shock can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body 512a that is bent downward comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the production operation unit attachment portion of the dish unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent unreasonable force from acting on 326a and the like, and prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4g-7. Effect of the second effect operation unit]
The effect of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. 74A is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74B is a sub-view of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production|operation operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button was extended in the state which faced the screen forward. Further, FIG. 75(a) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(b) is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74(b). FIG. 76(a) is a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is trying to do, (b) shows the site|part which is trying to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the sectional view of the 2nd production|operation operation unit of the state of (a). FIG. FIG. 77(a) is a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is trying to do, (b) shows the site|part which is trying to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the sectional view of the 2nd production|operation operation unit of the state of (a). FIG.

The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or the operation button according to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying an effect image in 410, and also to allow the player to operate the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

The total height of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is formed such that the overall width thereof is slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit 320, and between the lower end of the leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. A gap is formed in the. In other words, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper portion of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Is installed. As a result, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis line CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) becomes a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees to move upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is placed above the dish unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A). The central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head because it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a of the game board 5. Therefore, when the player drops the line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is possible in its front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). It is possible to see the operation button 410, the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the like in the operation button 410 in a good state.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 are slid on the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the normal state (the state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400A causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to move to the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring. Of the frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the center side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 is forward from the center opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, a portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inner side) of the button frame 412 is The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the button lens 411 with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

When the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A in the normal state, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis line CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for performance provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the central portion is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL of the button 410 is inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above like a conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

By the way, since the operation button for the performance in the conventional pachinko machine has a flat surface for the player to press, when the operation button is enlarged with the part to be pressed kept flat. , When pressing a part off the center of the operation button, the pressing surface is inclined so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot move back straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation may not be possible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight rearward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the performance to operate.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is hung. Since only the upper part is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the portion farthest from the attached portion. Since it occurs, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the second effect operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged immediately below the position (near the upper portion of the operation button 410) that is relatively easy for the player to perform the pressing operation, strong vibration is exerted on the player who is pressing the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 are attached. The buffer unit 510 is disposed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that is elastically deformable, and forms a gap between the main body portion 512a where the cushioning member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or tapped downward, the impact is multistaged by elastic deformation (compression) of the cushioning member 511, bending of the main body portion 512a of the cushioning base 512, or the like. It is possible to absorb, it is possible to avoid applying unreasonable force to the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like, and damage to the second production operation unit 400A and the like. Can be prevented. Therefore, when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or struck by a strong force, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second effect operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and prevent damage. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, as compared with the case of a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are high, and even when hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, which makes it less likely to be damaged.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back surface side thereof. Decorative decorations such as 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, in the area where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the area where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral edge part of the part inside the button lens 411 by the decoration of the concavo-convex combination of the triangles. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device. A gap is formed between the screen unit 470 and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470. However, the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the outside of the screen unit 470 and the rear side of the screen unit 470 from the front side (player side). The member of can be made invisible. Thereby, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the press-operable operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated, and the player who sees the operation button 410 can It is possible to prevent discomfort, and it is possible to arrange the door frame side second effect display device 460A inside the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the door frame side second effect display device 460A by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and the button frame 412. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like, which are on the rear side (back side) outside the outer circumference of the main screen 471, the sub-screen 472, and the like, pass through the transparent button lens 411 from the player side. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decoration portion 472 a of the sub-screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decoration member 478. The outer part (the part of the cross hatch surrounded by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 76) is made invisible to the player.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, a part outside the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (a cross-hatched part surrounded by a chain line in FIG. 76). ), but not to be seen from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the inner side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and by extension, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be improved.

Further, when the main screen 471 is in the first position in which it faces the front, the screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411, the button frame 412, and the like. Also, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the sub-screen 472, the rotation of the main screen 471, and the like. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, the operation is performed. The movement that exceeds the expectation of the player in the button 410 can have a strong impact on the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, when the sub-screen 472 is in the second position in which the sub-screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are configured by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411, the button frame 412, and the like. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decoration member 476) is rotatable, so that it is possible to increase the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated. It can entertain the player.

In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A, in the button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged on the rear side of the operation button 410, from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side. To the door frame side second effect display, which is provided with a polyhedral first button decoration portion 411a in which a plurality of triangular surfaces are combined within a predetermined width range, and which is arranged inside and behind the operation button 410 The device 460A includes a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square pyramids are arranged in an array, and a peripheral decoration member 478. As a result, the triangular decoration (first button decoration portion 411a) arranged on the front side and the rectangular decoration (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) arranged on the rear side are overlapped so as to intersect with each other. This makes it possible to show a complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance and prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Further, as described above, the first button decoration portion 411a mainly composed of the triangle, and the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478 mainly composed of the quadrangle are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, and therefore, the eyes of the player. When the positions move, the overlapping state changes, so that the geometric patterns that appear to overlap change and the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the decoration with a three-dimensional feeling with depth is displayed. Can be shown to entertain the player.

Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged inside and behind the operation button 410, the switching drive motor 492 drives the screen unit 470 to rotate so that the main screen 471 is directed forward or the sub screen. The 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration made of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state in which the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74(a), the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a and the peripheral edge decoration member 478 are vertically separated from each other, and extend vertically. A decoration with a geometric pattern in which a decoration composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row vertically crosses a decoration composed of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 is directed to the front, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the peripheral decoration portion 472a is in a state of extending in an annular shape, and a decoration including a plurality of square pyramids arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible for the player to show the geometric pattern decoration overlapping the decoration formed of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape on the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, since the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed by rotating the screen unit 470, the change in the decoration attracts the player's attention to the operation button 410, or changes the decoration. The change can be made to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen having a switchable screen (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) in the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, it is possible to display an effect image which is completely different from the effect image displayed by the liquid crystal display device, which has a strong impact on the player. Can be given to entertain. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471, a disc-shaped sub-screen 472 having a relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 at the center, and a center of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided so as to be spaced apart in the circumferential direction by a rotation angle of 90 degrees about the axis.

Then, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the state of the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a rectangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74(a)). When the effect image is radiated forward from the projector 500 arranged behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75(a)), and the translucent milky white color. Through the main screen 471, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape on the display screen. As a result, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape, while the display screen of a general liquid crystal display device is flat, so that the player can see the conventional display screen at a glance. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is different from that, and to surprise the player, and also to let the player pay attention to the main screen 471 and entertain the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471. be able to.

On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is in the second position with the sub-screen 472 facing forward, the disk-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and when viewed from the front, the circular operation button 410 has a circular shape. It seems that the sub-screen decoration member 476 imitating a skull is positioned in the center (see FIG. 74(b)). In this state, when the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472. By the way, since a flat plate-shaped non-translucent sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, an effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at this sub-screen decoration substrate 477. Thus, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75(b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light by the light, and the sub-screen provided at the center of the sub-screen 472 can be decorated. The screen decoration member 476 can be illuminated. Further, by causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made invisible and the front surface of the sub-screen 472 can be made invisible. The entire side can be brightly illuminated and decorated.

This door frame side second effect display device 460A causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 to emit light in the state where the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed to the front, and an effect image (video) from the projector 500 to the front. When illuminated, the effect image is displayed on the part of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on the part outside the sub-screen decoration member 476, which is a decoration imitating skull, and the effect image is displayed. The sub-screen decoration member 476, which is the inner side of the sub-screen, is illuminated and decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outer side of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and the decoration effect is completely different from the light emitting decoration of the decoration member in the conventional pachinko machine. It can be shown to the player, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be strongly focused on the sub-screen 472. Further, in this state, since the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (higher in brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, a partially high effect image which cannot be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and an effect image that can further entertain the player can be displayed.

As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. With this, since the player can see the decoration having a movement and a three-dimensional effect, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal can be obtained.

In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as effect images to the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 having the LED 477a mounted on the front side in the rear of the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) or to the front side. The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the interior of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated and decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

Also, behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer peripheries of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410, the operation button left outside decoration board 422 in the decoration board unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitted and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has the second LED 422b and the operation button right outside of the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 behind the frame side lens 417 exposed from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are provided between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is not leaked to the inner side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outer side of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. ..

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, By making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482 emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be excellently illuminated and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged inside and behind the operation button 410. It is possible to display the effect image by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and to present the player with an effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is not possible with conventional pachinko machines. , Can give the player a great impact and entertaining.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. 78A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 78C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78(a). The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decoration board 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 162 (door frame left side decoration board 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left part of the 100 on the left side of the through hole 111. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side in front view of the through hole 111, and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent member arranged in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member that is attached to the front upper portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. A decoration base 534, a left unit lower decoration base 535 that is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decoration lens member, and protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decoration base 534; A transparent left unit decoration cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decoration lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the left unit lower decoration base 535; And a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating in the front and rear direction on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 531a have circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. The left unit base 531 includes LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration board 160 (door frame left side upper decoration board 161 and door frame left side lower decoration board 162) from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located at substantially the center in the vertical direction when assembled on the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a having a circular shape in front view corresponding to the circular opening portion 531a in the left unit base 531 and a square lens having a square shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening portion 531a. And a lens portion 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration board 160 are located immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the rectangular lens portion 532b. Has been formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With this circular lens portion 532a, it is possible to irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged rearward to the front in a dot-like manner. The circular decoration portion of the left unit decoration lens member can be illuminated and decorated with the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffusion reflection portion 532c which is recessed conically rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape in the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases as a whole outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction as boundaries.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflecting portion 532f when cut along the radial direction is formed in a sawtooth shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape having a rearward sharp point. The front reflector 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflection portion 532f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction as boundaries. The radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

In the rectangular lens portion 532b assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

Light emitted from the LEDs 161a and 162a to the front of the rectangular lens portion 532b is input into the rectangular lens portion 532b from the input lens portion 532e. Since the input lens section 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel, and Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection section 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection section 532c is orthogonal to the axis extending in the front-back direction (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration board 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection section 532c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in various directions), and travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection section 532c travels from the center side to the outside (the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection section 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens section 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside in the prismatic lens portion 532b in a direction substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is forwarded by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c increases, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 81). Thus, the light that is reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection portion 532f from the center side toward the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the rectangular lens portion 532b can be diffused. It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the.

The prismatic lens portion 532b is divided into a plurality of concentric circular grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f, and a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are separated by the dividing lines. Are radially displaced so that concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the light emitted from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b to the front side has a concentric circular stripe pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade to the front. As a result, the multi-faced decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated substantially uniformly.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and the circular decorative portion formed in the portion in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. And a multifaceted decorative portion formed on the portion. The circular ornamental portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after the depression. In the multifaceted decorative portion, a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts are vertically arranged on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in the shape as described above. The circular decoration portion and the multifaceted decoration portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decoration portion 561a and the multifaceted decoration portion 561b of the right unit decoration lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decoration lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decoration cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 by the light emitted from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 to the front of the circular decorative portion. Each of them is illuminated by the light radiated on them.

The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a quadrangle that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape that extends forward and backward. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined such that a portion constituting a lower surface of the outer periphery thereof projects downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the front end moves backward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that an intermediate portion in the up-down direction is recessed rearward, and a lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, and a left portion is left. The upper part is bent backward so as to follow the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535, and the lower part of the upper dogleg part and the upper end of the lower dogleg part are connected. And a linear portion.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

The decorative member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of a non-translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86 and the like. 82A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 82C is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 82(a). FIG. 86(a) is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 82(a), and FIG. 86(b) is a sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 82(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 in front view, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decoration board 552 attached to the door frame, and the front side of the door frame right side decoration board 552 are attached to the left side from the front center of the front surface of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-back direction. A transparent plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member And a transparent unit right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the unit 554.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is a front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 and a right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 in front view, and a right side of the front view center and a right unit left diffusing lens in front of the right unit base 551. The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 which is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and which is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and is decorated. A sheet-shaped right unit right decoration member 557, and a transparent plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decoration member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and extends in the vertical direction and the front-back direction with the front and right sides open, and is shallow. A box-shaped non-translucent right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are attached to the left side so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. The right unit right light-blocking member 560, which is a flat plate-shaped unit, is provided.

The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right with a polyhedral decoration at the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decoration lens member 561, the right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating in the front-rear direction, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically pass through the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape. The door frame right side decoration board 552 is mounted on the front side with a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the left-right center, on the front side with the right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the left-right center, and on the front side in the left-right center. A plurality of middle LEDs 552c are provided. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for allowing the right unit left decoration member 554 to emit light through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552b is for allowing the right unit right decoration member 557 to emit light through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for allowing the right unit decoration lens member 561 to emit light.

The front and rear surfaces of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right side in front view in a short flat plate shape. A cutout portion 553c that is formed in a rectangular shape from the right end side of the rear wall portion 553b in the front view to the left side and is formed in plural at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body portion 553a in the front view. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so as to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e that is provided rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and is provided in plurality in the vertical direction, on the right side of the main body portion 553a when viewed from the front. The input lens part 553e is provided with a plurality of side surface reflection parts 553f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be at the center in the vertical direction.

The body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and a lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the main body portion 553a moves to the right in front view from the rear end side toward the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a projects forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end of the rear wall portion 553b extends substantially to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

The plurality of cutouts 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 emits light favorably by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape of the right unit left decoration member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decoration member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed at approximately the center in the vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle is projected rearward, and is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. And a part. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration board 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality of (six) side surface reflection parts 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection part 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens part 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is formed on the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side-face reflecting portion 553f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces toward the center when the input lens portion 553e is cut in the radial direction. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 to the front proceeds from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread it, and the input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. It will be spread radially toward the front centering around.

The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 552 so that the entire main body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front as it moves toward the front. The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and entering the main body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e strikes the flat left surface inside the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body portion 553a due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side surface reflection portion 553f side at the inner surface of the left surface. Becomes

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward in front view by hitting the sawtooth side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is illuminated brightly, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light that is emitted from the side surface reflection portion 553f to the right side and left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is left. The light that is reflected toward one side and passes through the main body portion 553a is emitted to the left, so that the right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

Further, in the side surface reflection portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc-shaped grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (to the left) is prevented from having the light and shade of the concentric stripe pattern. It is possible to illuminate the left side with a lighter and more uniform light. As a result, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view left side of the main body portion 553a (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed). A pattern made up of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves of the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decoration member 554, the pattern of the side surface reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decoration member 554 is transparent. Such a portion can be decorated by the side surface reflection portion 553f.

The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo according to the concept of the effect presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Has been applied. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left side in a front view in a short flat plate shape. A portion 556b, a rear wall portion 556b, a notch portion 556c which is notched in a quadrangular shape from the left end side in a front view to the right side, and is formed in plural at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side in a front view of the main body portion 556a. A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to house the unit right decoration member 557, an input lens portion 556e that is protruded rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and is provided in the vertical direction, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. On the left surface side, a plurality of side surface reflection portions 556f are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view whose upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as that of the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the entire main body portion 556a moves toward the left side in front view from the rear end side toward the front, with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

The rear wall portion 556b, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, has its left end extending to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part of them corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state in which the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the rectangular opening portion penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed by the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the cutout portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 can be favorably illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed at approximately the center in the vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle is projected rearward, and is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved spherically. And a part. These input lens portions 556e are respectively positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 556a.

The side surface reflecting portion 556f is provided in a plurality (six) in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflection portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e in each groove is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves is directed toward the center side when the side surface reflecting portion 556f is cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 556e. The whole is formed in a saw shape. In addition, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 goes from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread the light, and the input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. It will be spread radially toward the front centering around.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 552 so that the entire main body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it moves toward the front. The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and entering the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e strikes the flat right surface of the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a due to the relationship of the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, and is reflected to the side surface reflection portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. Becomes

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in a front view by hitting the sawtooth side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light blocking member 560 is illuminated brightly, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light blocking member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. .. Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light reflected to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f to the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 Light that is reflected toward one side and passed through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, so that the right unit right decoration member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

In the side surface reflection portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc-shaped grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (to the right) is prevented from being light having the light and shade of a concentric stripe pattern. Therefore, it is possible to irradiate the light with more uniform light and shade to the right. As a result, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body 556a (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed) in front view. A pattern made up of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves of the portion 556f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side surface reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit right decoration member 557 is visible. This portion can be decorated by the side surface reflection portion 556f.

The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo according to the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Has been applied. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed to have a side view shape that is substantially the same as the side unit shapes of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides thereof open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right side in front view in a short flat plate shape, and the rear portion. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in a front view to the left side, and a plurality of notch portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is moved upward as it goes forward. The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 are formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the main unit 553a, 556a.

The rear wall portion 559b, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, has its left end extending to the right of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. The plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutout portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state in which the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c satisfactorily emit the right unit decoration lens member 561. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are separated from each other in the vertical direction at the same height as the width of the left and right, and are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decoration member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right unit right light blocking member 560 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the vertically extending quadrangular front end is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have an inclined shape, and has substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes the right side opening of the right unit left light blocking member 559, which is formed in a shallow box shape, to the right side when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 86, the right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a non-translucent member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, respectively. The left light 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 respectively corresponding to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and It can be illuminated and decorated only by the middle LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged on the rear side of each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four vertically by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. By the LED 552c in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, it is possible to prevent light from interfering with each other, so that the portion of the right unit decoration lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide vertically into a plurality of (four) regions and individually light-embellish them.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after the depression. In the multifaceted decorative portion 561b, a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions are vertically arranged on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in the shape that it was installed.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multifaceted decorative portion 561b are divided into four spaces by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top among the parts located in the front, the multi-faced decoration parts 561b are arranged one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the vertical direction, and the bottommost part is the multi-faced decoration part 561a. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged rearward.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. The front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly projects forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562 when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of a non-translucent member. The three decoration members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decoration lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward in a plate shape larger than the door frame left side unit 530, and protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 independently includes a right unit left decoration member 554 and a right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both the protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decoration lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be made to emit light and be decorated.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes largely to the front, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 becomes adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exert an effect like a partition between the spaces. As a result, the player playing on the pachinko machine 1 can be made to feel as if he/she is playing in a private room, and other surrounding players can play in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. You can

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 is largely projected forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, when the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light emission, even if the book is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the book is viewed from a distance. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a defect such as a ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By illuminating the members 561 and the like in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify the attendant of the game hall of the occurrence of the problem and quickly respond to the problem. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed and reducing the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. 87A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 87C is a view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear. It is a perspective view. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. 90 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line P-P in FIG. 87. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and to the upper side of the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the center of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base 110 above the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110 at the center in the left-right direction, and on both left and right sides of the center base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, and extending in the left-right direction, with the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating forward and backward at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 having a box-like open rear side, and from the position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. Each of the slits has a plurality of slits 574b (three in each of the left and right) extending in the front-rear direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The slits 574b are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. A unit main body 271 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which are arranged on the front sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 and are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a, respectively. ing.

The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction and has a translucent top middle decoration member 576, and is mounted on the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576. A door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b which are respectively mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and which are closed at the same time, and left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three in each of the left and right) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and the top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. Top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580 attached to the left and right sides and covering the front surfaces of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578, and top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decoration. Top middle left decoration members 581 that are attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front sides of the lens members 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 to the vicinity of the center side end of the opening 574a, respectively. The top middle right decoration member 582 is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached inside the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, respectively, and the LEDs are respectively mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 that are open, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the rear side of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction penetrate therethrough. A pair of board bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and a door in which a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a are mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of board bases 585. The frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 are attached to the front side of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 to the rear side of the unit main body 271, respectively. And a pair of light blocking members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and the unit lower cover 574d so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are obliquely attached such that the front surface of each of the upper speakers 573 assembled to the door frame top unit 570 is rearward so that the side closer to the left-right center of the door frame top unit 570 moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower part near the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward as viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed such that the shape of the unit body 271 in a front view is a rectangular shape that extends left and right, and is cut out as a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a quadrangle extending in the left-right direction in plan view, and a portion having a half width of the quadrangle (left-right direction length) centered on the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle as the bottom. A trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Therefore, the unit main body 271 has a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 and the left and right ends of the front end of the front portion of the unit main body 271 on both sides of the front portion at the center in the left-right direction. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the positions from both ends in the left-right direction on the front surface to positions outside the parts protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits that extend laterally at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction in a portion that extends obliquely to the frontwardly protruding trapezoidal portion. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from near the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that extends obliquely to the front, to near the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, and three slits 574b are vertically spaced apart from each other.

Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c that is cut out in a square shape from the rear end toward the front in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a lower opening 574d that is cut away from the rear end toward the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Are provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

Further, the unit main body 271 is provided with a top left decoration portion 574e and a top right decoration portion 574f which extend vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at the substantially same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion projecting forward in the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The decoration member 576 in the top has a shape in a front view that is bent so that the central portion of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the right and left sides of the variable pentagon. It is formed in a shape that is a combination of a substantially right-angled triangle that connects the tip of each side and the lower ends of the right and left sides of the side pentagon. The decoration member 576 in the top is inclined such that the part of the pentagonal shape on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has a light-transmitting property.

The door frame top middle decoration board 577 is arranged such that the front surface is inclined so that the front surface is along the front surface of the pentagonal part of the top middle decoration member 576 and is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration board 577, and the top middle decoration member 576 can be made to emit light by making these LEDs emit light.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front portion of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 as the end side and the side close to the center as the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight left and right from the end side toward the center side. 578a and an arcuate portion 578b that extends in an arcuate shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight part 578a toward the center side. In the light guide member 578, the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arcuate portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction is decreased in the arc portion 578b so as to decrease toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffusive reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-like concavo-convex portion, and a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, which has a plurality of irregularities. Equipped with.

In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the left and right outer ends face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration board 587. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both ends in the left and right direction, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. While advancing inside, the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a sequentially reflects the light forward from the end portion side, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decoration lens member 579 or a top right decoration lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of these in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated and decorated.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decoration board 583 and the door frame top middle left decoration board 586, or the door frame top right decoration board 584 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587. Light from the LEDs 584a, 587a can be guided to light-emit the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in the front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decoration lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that individually accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square truncated pyramid are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decoration lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decoration portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decoration lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 through the three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that individually accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, the projections and depressions of a square truncated pyramid that are projected forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decoration lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decoration lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 through the three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the top left decoration lens member 579 so as to fill up the space between the three decoration lens portions 579a in the state where the top middle left decoration member 581 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decoration lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decoration member 581 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decoration lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached so as to fill up the space between the three decoration lens portions 580a of the top right decoration lens member 580 in a state where it is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front side near the center is the top right. The decorative lens member 580 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle right decoration member 582 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 583a can each independently emit light. By the LED 583a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583, a portion of the top left decoration lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 is inserted through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminous.

The door frame top right decoration board 584 is attached inside the right side surface (top right decoration portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. On the door frame top right decoration board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 584a can each independently emit light. By the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the portion located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 in the top right decorative lens member 580 is positioned via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminous.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 includes side walls that are substantially square in a side view and have sides that extend vertically and longitudinally, a rear wall that is a square in a front view that extends outward in the left-right direction at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. A diagonal line that connects the upper side of the side wall to the middle of the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall that connects the upper sides of the right-angled triangle, and an opposite side of the upper wall that connects the lower side of the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall. And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and is formed in a triangular columnar box shape with an opening between upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271. To the board base 585, the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. To be The door frame top middle left decoration board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585, so that the front surface moves to the left and right so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It will be tilted. Accordingly, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed in a state where the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. Is almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state in which the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled. The door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 causes a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit light, thereby causing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 of the top left decoration lens member 579 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the right rear side from the left-right center of the unit main body 271. To be The door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585, so that the front surface moves to the left and right so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It will be tilted. Thus, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is a surface of a portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction are formed in a state in which the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. Is almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the plurality of LEDs 587a are facing forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271. The door frame top middle-right decoration substrate 587 causes a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light, thereby causing the portion of the top-right decoration lens member 580 near the top-middle decoration member 576 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light blocking members 588 are made of a non-translucent member and are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The light blocking member 588 is provided between the upper and lower LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit body 271. It is partitioned. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration are provided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated and decorated in a state where they are independent of each other.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration board 577, a door frame top left decoration board 583, a door frame top right decoration board 584, a door frame top middle left decoration board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decoration board 587 at the top of the frame and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top middle decoration member 576 that projects forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are curved so as to be hollowed back. Therefore, it is possible to make the player illusion that only the top middle decoration member 576 is largely projected forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580, which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged at the center, on the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal behind the left and right ends near where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided, and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically spaced apart from each other, the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583, the door frame top right decoration by the plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The function and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a through-hole 111 penetrating the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the front and back is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced according to the expansion of the through-hole 111, and the widths of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is small. This allows the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed as broadly as possible by the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). The game board 5 has a large game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) that has a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the left-right direction below the through hole 111. And the front surface of the lower halves (the portion below the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 (the front surface of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) is recessed so as to be hollowed back (the plate unit It is formed in a concave shape so that the front faces on the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 are located rearward rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the production operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center of the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction appears to project significantly forward, and thus the effect operation unit 400 is conspicuously highlighted to the player. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

In the door frame 3, the effect operation unit 400 arranged on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 is tilted so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 is directed obliquely upward and forward. Since the player is attached in a state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his or her line of sight to direct the effect operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state of being substantially front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized intensely, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 can be increased. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 that has a large diameter and is substantially rounded and bulges forward in the same height as the overall height of the dish unit 320, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to move the hand by a short distance. Since any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. Further, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is attached in a tilted state, not only can it be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but also left and right. On the other hand, the operation can be performed favorably even from the front side, and the operation button 410 with good operability can further enhance the effect using the operation button 410.

Further, the door frame 3 is mounted with the rendering operation unit 400 by the dish unit 320 in a suspended state, and is provided with the vibration motor 424 for generating vibration in the lower portion of the rendering operation unit 400, so that the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated in accordance with the state to generate vibration, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper portion of the operation button 410, which makes the player surprise the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is larger than the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath becomes inconspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and to appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 with high strength can be provided.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the performance operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. It can be recognized by touch that the lower plate 322 has a larger volume than that.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is a lower plate for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball supply port 323c from which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction, and is arranged outside the right side of the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in a front view. That is, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged on the rear side such as the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed, The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the lower plate 322, the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball-draining hole 322a arranged below (in front of) the lower plate ball-feeding port 323c. Then, the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the player side cannot see the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 and the like through the lower dish 322 to the dollar box is also possible. I can't see. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the game balls etc. paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to restrain the player from devoting himself or herself to the game (the driving operation of the game ball or the effect image). it can.

Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray 322a in which the lower tray 322a has a lower tray bowl removal hole 322a located at a position closer to the front left of the lower tray bowl supply port 323c, and the lower tray 322 on the right side of the lower tray bowl removal hole 322a stands upright. Since the raised wall is curved obliquely so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game ball supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c is directly changed to the lower dish ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall portion. As a result, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are areas on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first area A1), the lower plate 322 of the lower plate 322 can be seen without showing the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326, which the lower tray 322 faces forward, between the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his/her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his/her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand, so the main body frame 4 The sound from the speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be favorably output to the front, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his or her hand on or comes close to the lower plate 322, it is possible to make the player tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the speaker 921 that is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain people and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 that is largely plate-shaped and protrudes frontward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine which is adjacent to the right side, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to make the player feel as if he or she is playing, and to let the other players around play the game in a relaxed atmosphere.

Further, the door frame 3 is a plate-shaped, and the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that projects greatly forward can be decorated with light emission, so that the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a lined gaming hall. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as a lateral direction along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that projects forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are A shape that is recessed so as to be hollowed backward (a middle middle decoration member in the door frame top unit 570 is more than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. The front surface on both the left and right sides of 576 is formed in a concave shape so that it is located rearward. As a result, since only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to be largely projected forward, the top middle decoration member 576 can be conspicuously highlighted to the player, The middle decoration member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other in the left and right are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that extend from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to the both ends in the left and right direction in front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated. As a result, the upper front portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are not conspicuous in the upper portion of the door frame 3, and the decoration distinct from that of the conventional pachinko machine is provided. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is present and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. At the same time, the pair of upper speakers 573 allows the player to enjoy good stereo sound. it can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. , Each of which has a large protrusion to the front at the center in the left-right direction, so that it is possible to show the player a uniform decoration in the top and bottom where a virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction is conspicuous. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

Further, since the door frame 3 projects the front middle decoration member 576 and the rendering operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically at the center in the left-right direction, the middle middle decoration member 576. When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape having an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. This main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a part of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are respectively rotatably attached are provided, and the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front side left side surface of the main body frame base 600. ..

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 700 for locking the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the player side, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable and closable attachment to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It is provided with a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, as shown in FIGS. 91 to 94. This main body frame base 600 penetrates in the front and back in a range of a height of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end, and a game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game. The game board mounting portion 602 which forms the lower side of the board insertion opening 601 and on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the left and right ends of the lower end of the game board 5 which project upward from the horizontal center of the game board mounting portion 602. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the backward movement.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 is a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting the ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view, and a launching device mounting portion 604 on the right side in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 605 which penetrates the front and rear and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a front and rear penetrating front and rear from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in a front view. A connection opening 606 that allows the frame relay board 911 to face forward, and a circular shape that penetrates the front and rear at the lower left side in a front view of the game board mounting portion 602 so that the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 faces forward. And a speaker opening 607.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 in front view, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is attached. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions of the rear surface at the left end in front view, and is attached to the upper hinge for attaching the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A portion 609 and a lower hinge mounting portion 610 are provided.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so that the connection opening 606 can be opened and closed, and a position slightly lower than the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in a front view. , A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 601.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member and body frame lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame upper hinge member 60, and the upper hinge main body 621 penetrates on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 in a front view to pivotally support the door frame upper hinge member 140. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame for. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 of the body frame base 600 at a portion of the upper hinge body 621 that is bent downward.

The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates up and down at a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a lower hinge first main body 641 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. An outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) axially supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a flat plate which is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. Hinge second main body 643 in which the rear portion of the plate-shaped plate member is bent upward in an L shape, and the lower hinge second main body 643 vertically penetrates at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643, and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 The door frame hinge hole 644 for axially supporting the door frame and the door frame hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend upward from the left end at the rear side. A restriction piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the.

The lower hinge second main body 643 has a horizontally extended portion with a certain distance above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a portion bent upward has a lower hinge first portion. The main body 641 is in contact with the front surface of the upwardly bent portion. In the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, the portions of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 that are bent upward are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, in the reinforcing frame 660, on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 is restricted from moving forward and downward. A pair of left positioning members 661 are attached vertically separated from each other.

This reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side when viewed from the front) of the main body frame base 600, and the inside of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) is passed from the left side between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball launching device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the turning angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 680 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a flat plate-shaped launching base 681. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a batting mallet 683 having a base end attached to a rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a diagonally upward leftward extension from the vicinity of the tip of the batting mallet 683. It is equipped with a launch rail 684 which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and on which a game ball can roll.

In this ball launching device 680, game balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 684, and the game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with the strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 683 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

In addition, when the hit game ball does not reach within the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball or the like, between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). Then, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 275 of the foul cover unit 270 below, passes through the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower tray 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4, and can lock the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extending portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and includes a plurality of unit bases 701 protruding forward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a columnar shape protruding forward from the lower portion of the unit base 701, A protrusion is projected from the front end portion in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmission member 212 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door is rotated according to the rotation direction of the key. And a key cylinder 710 for unlocking the lock of either the frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 113. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. Further, FIG. 99A is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 99B is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. 101(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 101(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the rear. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 104(a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 104(b) is a sectional view taken along the line Q-Q in (a). Further, FIG. 105(a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the ball removing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 105(b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the ball removing movable piece. Is.

Further, FIG. 106A is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 106B is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 107(a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 108A is a perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 108B is a perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 111(a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is closed in the lower tank ball path unit, and FIG. 111(b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is open. .. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game balls in the payout unit.

As shown in FIG. 95, FIG. 96, etc., the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is mounted on the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 that is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, which stores game balls supplied from the island facility of a game hall (not shown) that extends to the left and right and is opened upward. It is provided with a tank rail 803 extending left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. Inside the tank rail 803, while guiding the game balls to the left, they are aligned in two rows in the front and rear by the ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) hanging swingably from above.

Further, the payout unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the upper left side in the front view of the payout unit base 801, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and on the lower side of the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and pays out the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And are equipped with. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, the game balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the game balls are paid out one by one.

Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801, guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 to the lower side, and according to the stored state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank ball route unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. Ordinary guide path 861 that guides the game ball forward to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end, guides the game ball discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e to the front side of the door frame 3 A guideway opening/closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the full tank guideway 862 for guiding to the full tank receiving port 274 and the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 according to opening/closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, And a lower full ball path unit 860 having a.

[4-6a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821, and has a front side open. 821 and the rear case 822, which are mounted between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 to partition the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and a partition plate 823 that penetrates through the partition plate 823 so that the front and rear ends are the front case 821 and the rear case 822. An attached rod-shaped shaft member 824, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and arranged in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826, and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 that is mounted in the front case 821 and that can detect the rotational positions of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the pair of movable piece member rear 826.

The front case 821 has a ball guide entrance 821a that is open at the upper part of the right side surface for allowing game balls to pass through, and a ball guide exit that is open for allowing game balls to pass at a position to the right of the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. 821b, a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c extends obliquely from the ball guide inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of the height from the guide portion 821d along the left side of the front case 821. It is composed of a detection portion 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering portion 821f that extends in a meandering shape from the detection portion 821e in the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a cutout portion 821g on the wall on the right side in front view of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

The rear case 822 has a ball guide inlet 822a that is open to allow the game balls to pass in the upper portion of the right side surface, and a ball guide outlet that is open to allow the game balls to pass at a position to the right of the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 822c extends obliquely from the ball guide inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of the height from the guide portion 822d along the left side of the rear case 822. It is composed of a detecting portion 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f that extends in a meandering shape from the detecting portion 822e to the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a cutout portion 822g on the wall on the right side in front view of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c.

The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. The rear case 822 is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are aligned in the front-rear direction when assembled in the ball guide unit 820. There is.

The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the cutouts 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 has a vertically extending flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b which penetrates the front and rear at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, connecting the extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, and extending in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. The connecting portion 825d, the weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole that penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and can be detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and a flat plate shape that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. And a stopper piece 825g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in a state in which the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is projected into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The guide passage 821c (detection portion 821e) is brought into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c (detection portion 821e). The stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, so that the lower end of the movable piece 825a is prevented from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the movable piece member front 825 causes the left side surface of the movable piece 825a to move toward the guide passage 821c. It matches the inside. In this state, the detection piece 825f at the front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 becomes non-detection.

The movable piece member rear 826 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates the shaft member 824 in the front and rear direction at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a, and the movable piece 826a. From the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right side of the movable piece 826a, the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. The connecting portion 826d, the weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole that penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. A detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and can be detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and a flat portion that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. And a stopper piece 826g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is projected into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c (detection unit 822e). The stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, so that the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the movable piece member rear 826 causes the surface on the left side of the movable piece 826a to move toward the guide passage 822c. It matches the inside. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the movable piece member rear 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 becomes non-detection.

The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied in a state where a plurality of game balls are lined up in a row by the tank rail 803, and a plurality of game balls are lined up in a row, and the front case 821 and the rear case are arranged. By 822, it is possible to guide the dispensing device 830 below in a two-row state (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and can be distributed well. You can

Further, when the game sphere flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game sphere comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are formed. The front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are in the non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it is understood that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls or the like, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c will flow downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction parts 821d and 822d becomes strong, and the game ball flowing through the introduction parts 821d and 822d is a movable piece above the detection parts 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the vibration sandwiches or intrudes between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the cutouts 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Dirt, dust, and the like that have accumulated can be removed, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can satisfactorily rotate due to their own weight and the like.

Further, the ball guiding unit 820 is configured to detect the game balls circulating in the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member rear 826 is detected by the single out-of-ball detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the movable piece member front The movable piece 825a, 826a of 825 or the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated so as to project into the guide passages 821c, 822c, and the detection pieces 825f, 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. It Therefore, it is possible to detect the out-of-ball of the game ball early, so that the game ball can be quickly replenished, and the time when the game is interrupted is shortened as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by screwing metal screws as weights to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight are attached. By this, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the directions projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower ends thereof project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust inside the guide passages 821c and 822c is reduced. No dust or the like adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, and the like do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls, so that the self-weight etc. With this, it is possible to satisfactorily rotate, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem such that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has movable pieces 825a, 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 whose lower end side projects into the guiding passages 821c, 822c through which the game balls flow due to its own weight. By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface contacting the game ball, the movable piece is moved by the weight of the weight and the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. The lower ends of the 825a and 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower ends thereof project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust inside the guide passages 821c and 822c is reduced. No dust or the like adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, and the like do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls, so that the self-weight, etc. With this, the movable pieces 825a and 826a (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) can be prevented from rotating, which can be prevented from occurring.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes to attach the weight, even if the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 rotate frequently, The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (weight attachment portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time. .. Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 by simply screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the labor of attaching the weight can be simplified. Therefore, the cost for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, in the guide passages 821c and 822c, since the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided with the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a, on the upstream side of the site where the movable pieces 825a and 826a project inward. Since the game ball contacts the movable pieces 825a and 826a by flowing the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust, dust, and the like that are sandwiched between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and that are invaded. It is possible to favorably rotate the front piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826.

Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be favorably rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to erroneous detection and the like. In addition, even if the gaming balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the prompt The game balls can be replenished to the player, and the time when the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, so that it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The payout device 830 has a box-like shape with an open rear side, and a payout opening 831a in which a game ball is opened in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a game ball is opened in a vicinity of the left end in front view on the bottom surface. The payout exit 831b, the ball removal exit 831c in which the game ball is open near the right end in the front view on the bottom surface, the payout path 831d that communicates the payout entrance 831a and the payout exit 831b , And a front box 831 that has a ball-out passage 831e that branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball-outlet outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-like opening with the front side open, and a payout opening 832a in the center of the top surface that allows the game ball to pass through in the left-right direction, and a payout in the bottom surface that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view. An outlet 832b, a ball removal outlet 832c that is open near the right end of the bottom surface in the front view so that game balls can pass through, a payout passage 832d that communicates the payout opening 832a and the payout exit 832b, and payouts. A rear box 832 is provided which has a ball-removing passage 832e, which branches from the middle of the passage 832d and communicates with the ball-removing outlet 832c and through which game balls can flow.

Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and a rotation shaft which is attached to the front box 831 and penetrates the front box 831. And a drive motor 834 attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshes with each other so that the front box 831 and the front cover 833 can rotate. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the front gear, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and a driven gear 837 rotatably passing therethrough, the front end of which is attached to the front cover 833 and A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a rotatably mounted shaft member 838 which penetrates the shaft member 838, and the payout passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. And a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is disposed between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and that detects the rotation of the delivery blade 839. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 for partitioning the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball that is paid out by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and is discharged from the payout exits 831b and 832b, and the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passage. 831e and 832e are rotatably attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a branching point, and a ball-removing movable piece 843 that can close the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e and the front box 831 and the rear box 831. The box 832 is provided with a ball-pulling lever 844 that is attached so as to be slidable up and down on the right side of the front view and that makes the ball-pulling movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable.

The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball exit 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 of the entire height of the front box 831. Bends so as to extend vertically, and bends so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the overall height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right width of the front box 831 from the left end. As described above, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 831b at a height of about ¼ of the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 831b. The payout vane 839 is arranged at a crank-shaped portion in the payout passage 831d.

On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e is a form in which the portion of the delivery passage 831d that extends obliquely to the lower right from the delivery opening 831a is further extended. There are branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the front box 831 is formed in an upper part on the right side surface in front view, and a guide shelf 831f projecting rearward as it goes downward in a portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 slidably up and down.

The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about ⅓ of the total height of the rear box 832. Bends so as to extend vertically, and bends so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the rear box 832. As described above, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height of about ¼ from the bottom with respect to the total height of the rear box 832 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The payout vane 839 is disposed in a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 832d.

On the other hand, the ball removal passage 832e is a form in which the portion of the delivery passage 832d that extends obliquely downward and to the right from the delivery opening 832a is further extended. There are branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the rear box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the dispensing outlet 832b in the dispensing passage 832d, and a guide shelf 832f projecting forward as it goes downward, and an upper part of the right side surface in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 slidably up and down.

The payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The dispensing passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the dispensing blade 839 is arranged. A payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. In other words, the game ball that has flowed through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that has flowed through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are located before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. The payout detection sensor 842 is moved to the vicinity of the boundary and detected.

The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an interval of 60 degrees from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c that is formed in a cylindrical shape rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a and that has irregularities formed on the peripheral surface at the rear end and that can be connected to the payout blade 839 are provided. ..

The payout blade 839 extends in the front-rear cylindrical shape and has a base tubular portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted, and protrudes in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The plural (three) front blades 839b and the rear end of the base cylindrical portion 839a protrude in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so that the front blade 839b is staggered. 3) The rear blade 839c and the connected portion which is formed in a tubular shape from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a to the front and has an unevenness capable of being connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

Each of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the payout blade 839 is provided at three intervals at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c and the rear blade 839c are arranged so as to be staggered so as to alternate. It is offset at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc recessed toward the center side, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball storage portion 839e capable of storing only one game ball is formed.

Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that their outer diameters D1 around the axis of the base tubular portion 839a are 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 about the axis of the base tubular portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a in the arcuate portion (sphere containing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2)/2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the sphere accommodating portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is quadrupled.

Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball can be held by the arc-shaped portion (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, the depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. This allows the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d to be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball accommodating portion 839e).

In the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the trailing blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout blade 839 is arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at a portion bent in a crank shape below the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below the portion vertically extending downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, in the crank-shaped portions of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the dispensing blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the dispensing blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In this embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball storage portion 839e to the arc-shaped portion of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. ..

Thereby, the payout device 830, when the game ball flowing down onto the payout vane 839 comes into contact with the outer circumferences of the front vane 839b and the rear vane 839c, passes through the cranked portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d. Therefore, it cannot be discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is housed in the ball housing portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the crank-shaped bent parts of the payout passages 831d and 832d, and from the payout exits 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is set to 1 by the ball housing portion 839e. Since the depth of /7 to 1/4 is accommodated, it is possible to shorten the time required for accommodating the game balls while reducing the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout vane 839 is rotated quickly, the game ball can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of payouts of the game ball per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time taken to pay out the game ball can be shortened.

The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends vertically and forward and backward in a plate shape, and a lower portion is bent to be formed in a character shape in a front view, and a main body portion 843a extends forward and backward in a tubular shape at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft cylinder portion 843b, both ends of which are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a projecting portion 843c projecting from an upper portion of an outer surface of the main body portion 843a bent in a V shape, and a main body portion 843a. And a weight attachment portion 843d (see FIG. 105) formed of a through hole penetrating forward and backward in a lower portion bent in a V shape.

In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball-removing movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the shaft cylinder portion 843b at the upper end dispenses the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to rotate at a position that extends obliquely from the payout entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view that is slightly above the part that bends downward. Installed on.

In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment is in a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower part of the ball-pulling lever 844 hits the protrusion 843c of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 from the right side in a front view. Touching. As a result, the ball-removable movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 105(a)).

In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a of the ball-removing movable piece 843 that is bent in a dogleg shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. Extending to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located in the vicinity of the portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball passage passages 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball-removing movable piece 843 (main body 843a) closes the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, and the left-side surface of the main body 843a forms part of the walls of the payout passages 831d and 832d. doing.

In the normal state, the ball-stripping movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the ball-shedding movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front is exerted, since the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball pulling lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

When the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball removing lever 844 is separated from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removing movable piece 843, and the ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view. Motion restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball-removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft tube portion 843b. The ball-removable movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise until the right side surface of the lower portion of the main body portion 843a comes into contact with the left surfaces of the members forming the right side surfaces of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105(b)). As a result, the ball removal passages 831e, 832e are opened, and the game balls that have entered from the payout openings 831a, 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d, 832d. The ball-removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front to open the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, flow through the opened ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, and are discharged downward from the ball-removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

In the present embodiment, since the ball-moving movable piece 843 is provided with the weight mounting portion 843d, the weight of the metal screw is screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d to mount the ball-leaving lever 844. When the regulation of counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 843 is projected into the ball-removing passages 831e, 832e by the weight of the ball-removing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. Direction (counterclockwise as viewed from the front) can be easily rotated.

Further, in a normal state in which the ball removing lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removing passages 831e, 832e, the game balls entering from the payout ports 831a, 832a enter the main body 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843. Since they are in contact with each other, the ball-removing movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to remove dust, dust, and the like that are sandwiched between the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e by the vibration of the ball-removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball-removing movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting of dust or the like.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d formed as the through hole, even if the ball removing movable piece 843 frequently rotates, the weight removes the ball removing movable piece 843. The ball-removing movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight attachment portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost related to can be reduced.

By the way, if the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust may be attached to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft may be rusted. The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout ports 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843, so the ball removing passage 831e causes the ball removing passage 831e. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball pulling lever 844 for releasing the closing is slid upward and unlocked, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removing movable piece 843. The ball-removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e can be surely opened.

Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, and thus the game ball removal work can be reliably performed. It is possible to improve workability in maintenance and the like.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. The upper tank bulb path unit 850 is attached to the position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 that is open on the rear side, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and is open on the front side. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward are provided.

In addition, the upper tank ball path unit 850 is an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that game balls can pass in the left side portion from the left-right center in the front view on the upper surface, and the right side from the left-right center in the front view on the upper surface. The upper ball removal port 850b, which is open upward so that the game balls can pass in the region of, and is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which game balls circulate, a normal discharge opening 850d that opens downward at a position immediately below the upper payout sphere receiving opening 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and the upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, and an upper ball storage passage that projects upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e. And a partition 850f partitioning the lower part inside 850c into left and right.

In addition, the upper tank ball passage unit 850, the upper ball removal passage 850g that guides the game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and the upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. And a ball removal outlet 850h. The upper tank full ball path unit 850 has a normal outlet 850d, a tank outlet 850e, and an upper ball outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side in a front view, and opens downward. Further, the upper tank full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 on the right end of the upper tank base 851.

In the state where the upper full-ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball extracting entrance 850b is provided. Is located immediately below the ball outlets 831c and 832c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full-ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full-tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guideways of the lower full-ball path unit 860. Each of 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball removing guide path 865 has an opening right above the rear end opening (see FIG. 113 ).

In the upper tank ball path unit 850, the game balls that are paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In the state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is emitted from the normal emission port 850d.

When the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and further, the normal guideway 861 of the lower tank ball path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, it is normally released. The outlet 850d is closed. In this state, when the game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the partition 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower tray 322 through the full tank guiding path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

In this way, the upper tank ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 in accordance with the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower tank full ball path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112. The lower tank full ball path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper tank ball path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower tank ball path unit 860 is a normal guide path 861 for guiding the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper tank ball path unit 850 forward and guiding it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. And, a full tank guide path 862 that guides the game balls emitted from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 to the front and guides the game balls from the front end to the full tank receiver port 274 of the door frame 3, and normally. A guideway opening/closing door 863 that opens and closes front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 in accordance with opening/closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and a guideway opening/closing door 863 that is a normal guideway 861 and a full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 that urges the front end opening in a direction to close the opening.

In addition, the lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game balls discharged from the upper ball outlet 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 to the front, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. A lower ball guide passage 865 for discharging to

In the lower tank full ball path unit 860, the normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball guide path 865 are sequentially arranged from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball removing guide path 865 have rear ends that open upward. Further, the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are lined up on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side becomes low. Furthermore, the full tank guideway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guideway 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that are vertically separable.

The guide path opening/closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is closed by a closing spring 864 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower tank ball path unit 860, the full tank guide path 862 opening to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower than the height of the sphere. The guideway opening/closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and on the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

The taxiway opening/closing door 863 includes a disk-shaped base portion 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate portion 863b that extends in a flat plate shape from the base portion 863a to the upper left side diagonally and that can normally close the front end opening of the taxiway channel 861. , A second door plate portion 863c extending from the base portion 863a to the right side in a flat plate shape and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a to a diagonally lower left side in a flat plate shape. , And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end portion of the extending portion 863d and can come into contact with the door opening/closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings and it is sufficient that the game balls cannot pass through. The operating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centering on the base 863a when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to project forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

The guide path opening/closing door 863 is biased in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is provided below the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

In the lower full ball path unit 860 of this embodiment, the front end of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 has a through ball passage 273, a full ball receiving port 274, and a door opening/closing member in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). The guideway opening/closing door 863 has no contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the guideway opening/closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the game ball in the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guide The game ball does not spill from the path 862.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening/closing abutting portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening/closing door 863 to operate. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts against the biasing force of the closing spring 864 to rotate the guideway opening/closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction in front view. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861. In addition, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 111(b)). In this state, as shown in the drawing, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal guideway 861 and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862. ..

When the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank path are full. The penetrating ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide path 862. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

As described above, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 are changed by vertically changing the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862, and by rotating the guide path opening/closing door 863. Since it is opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening/closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening/closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 321. When is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guide path 861 is filled with the game ball, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper tank ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860, The payout of game balls is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830, and the lower plate 322 in addition to the upper plate 321 is filled with the game balls and the lower plate 322 cannot be supplied with the game balls, the foul cover unit 270. The game balls are stored in the storage passage 277. When the movable balls 278 are rotated by the game balls being stored in the storage passage 277 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full of game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

In addition, the stop of the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. In the state in which the storage tank 280c is in the state of being filled, it is possible to fill the storage passage 277 on the upstream side, the full tank guiding path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860, and the upper spherical storage path 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. When the game sphere is paid out, the payout of the game sphere by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, it is possible to store more game balls than the conventional pachinko machine, so in the gaming state where a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during the big hit game state, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are paid out by the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to pay attention to the fact that the player is full of game balls, and allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game state and entertain.

[4-7. Board unit]
The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a bass speaker inside the body unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the front view left side of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and housing a power supply board therein, and a speaker unit 920 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of the game balls are housed. And a payout control board box 950.

The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510, and the door body relay board mounted on the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is for. The payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950 controls the payout device 830.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119 and the like. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board 5. FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating a passage through which the game balls are distributed by the distribution member 2011. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, and FIGS. 117 and 118 are distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. It is a figure explaining the flow of the played game ball. FIG. 119 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit in an enlarged manner from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Also, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and the rear end of the game region 5a by partitioning the outer periphery of the game region 5a and having an outer shape of a substantially quadrangular shape in a front view. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 for partitioning, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 are driven by hitting the game balls into the game area 5a. It is provided with a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a (not shown).

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit mounted on the rear side of 1100, and a game board side effect display device 1600 that is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined effect image are configured. ing. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the game board 5, and a peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and also holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit is attached to the rear surface. The back unit is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and has a box-like shape that is open at the front and has a square opening in the rear wall. The display device 1600 is configured to include a lock mechanism for detachably attaching the display device 1600.

As shown in FIG. 114, a game board side effect display device 1600 having a liquid crystal display type display area is arranged at substantially the center of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1. In the game board side effect display device 1600, a variable game in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols respectively included in a plurality of symbol columns (three columns in this embodiment) are variably displayed is executed, and is executed in association with the variable game. Various display effects are displayed as images.

As will be described later, the function display unit 1400 provided at the lower left of the game board 5 includes a first special symbol display device 1403 including eight LEDs and a second special symbol display device 1405 including eight LEDs. Has been done. In the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405, the symbol variation for changing and displaying the special symbol is performed. The special symbol is a symbol for notification showing the result of determination (big hit determination) whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit. In the present embodiment, the variation game using the decorative symbol is stopped after the symbol variation in which the special symbol is varied and displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 is started. It is supposed to be executed as one game. Hereinafter, the symbol variation performed on the first special symbol display 1403 may be referred to as "first side symbol variation", and the symbol variation performed on the second special symbol display 1405 may be referred to as "second side symbol variation". Sometimes.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the symbol variation is started, from among a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), a big hit determination using which special symbol is performed. Is selected. Then, when the big hit determination using the special symbol on the selected side is performed, the control to start the symbol variation on the symbol display corresponding to the special symbol on the selected side based on the result of the big hit determination is performed. (Main control board 1310). In the symbol fluctuation started in this way, after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the big hit judgment, the big hit pattern (big hit display result), which is a special symbol stop mode capable of recognizing the big hit, and the small hit. Either the small hit pattern (small hit display result), which is the stop mode of the special symbol that can recognize the hit, or the deviating pattern (deviation display result), which is the stop mode of the special symbol, which can recognize the deviance. By being stopped, the player can recognize whether the player has won the big hit, the small hit, or the lose (miss). It should be noted that, when the jackpot pattern is stopped in the form of appearing, a jackpot game in which a player can obtain a prize ball is awarded. In addition, when the small hitting design is stopped in the form of appearing, the small hitting game where the player can obtain the prize ball is granted.

On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured with a display area larger than each of the symbol display devices 1403 and 1405, and in each of the display areas, a plurality of symbol rows (three rows in the present embodiment) are respectively provided. A plurality of types of decorative designs (a plurality of types of numbers) included are displayed in a larger size than the special designs.

Then, on the game board side effect display device 1600, display results corresponding to the display results of the respective symbol display devices 1403, 1405 are displayed. More specifically, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405, a special symbol combination is also displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. When a symbol combination such that the symbols are the same symbol) is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, the game board side effect display device Also in 1600, a special symbol combination different from that at the time of a big hit (such as a symbol combination in which the symbols in all columns are the same symbol) is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 is displaced. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the game board side effect display device 1600 also fixedly displays the symbol combination at the time of losing (a symbol combination in which the symbols in all rows are not the same symbol). Thereby, the player can more easily recognize whether the big hit, the small win, or the defeat (lost) is confirmed by checking the variable game played on the game board side effect display device 1600. Will be able to.

Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped in the order of the left column → the right column → the middle column when viewed from the player side, and two specific columns (in the present embodiment, The reach state is formed when the same decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in two columns (left and right). In the present embodiment, the left row of the plurality of symbol rows is the first stop row, the right row is the second stop row, the middle row is the third stop row, and the left row and the right row are reach formation rows that form a reach state. Becomes

Here, the "temporary stop display" is something that can appear during a period in which the special symbols are maintained in a changing state on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405, and the game board side In the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative pattern is displayed in a fluctuation-changing state. On the other hand, the "fixed stop display" means that when the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405, or it can appear after that, the game board side In the display area of the effect display device 1600, any of the decorative symbols does not fluctuate and is stopped.

As will be described later, the function display unit 1400 is further provided with a first LED including two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings for receiving the game balls into the first left starting opening 2002a and the first right starting opening 2002b. By the special reserve number indicator 1404, the second special reserve number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the reserve number related to the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004, and the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 composed of four LEDs for displaying the judgment result is provided, and a normal reservation display 1408 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball to the gate 2003. ing.

Here, the first special reserved number display 1404 informs the player of the number of memories of the jackpot determination on the side of the first special symbol that is reserved in the unexecuted state (hereinafter, also referred to as the first reserved memory number). To do. The first reserved memory number is incremented by "1" by the game ball winning the first left starting opening 2002a or the first right starting opening 2002b arranged on the game board 5, while the first side symbol variation By starting, "1" is subtracted. Therefore, when the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 within the period in which the first side symbol variation is performed, the first reserved memory number is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (first upper limit number, In this embodiment, up to “4”) is accumulated.

In addition, the second special reserved number display 1406 notifies the player of the number of memories of the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side that is suspended in the unexecuted state (hereinafter, also referred to as the second reserved memory number). It is a thing. The second reserved memory number is incremented by "1" when the game ball wins the second starting opening 2004 arranged on the game board 5, while the second side symbol variation is started by "1". Is subtracted. Therefore, when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004 within the period in which the second side symbol variation is performed, the second reserved memory number is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (second upper limit number, In this embodiment, up to “4”) is accumulated.

In addition, in the normal symbol display 1402, when it is determined whether or not it is a normal hit (ordinary determination), a normal symbol variation that varies a plurality of types of normal symbols is performed based on the result of the ordinary determination. This normal symbol fluctuation, after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the normal judgment, the normal hit symbol (ordinary hit display result) that is the normal symbol stop mode that can recognize the normal hit, and Ordinary outliers that are normally recognized as outliers that can be recognized as outliers (outlier display results) are stopped in such a way that the player wins the ordinary win or loses (ordinary loss). You will be able to recognize what you did. In addition, when the normal winning symbol is stopped in the form of appearing, the later-described normal electric winning port 2011 is opened.

In addition, the normal hold display unit 1408 notifies the player of the number of storages of the normal determination (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of general-use hold storages) that is held in an unexecuted state. The number of stored ordinary figures is incremented by "1" when the game ball is received by the gate section 2003 arranged on the game board 5, while it is subtracted by "1" when the normal symbol variation is started. Therefore, when the game ball is accepted in the gate unit 2003 within the period in which the normal symbol variation is performed, the number of stored universal symbols is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (upper limit of universal symbols, in the present embodiment, is used). "4") is accumulated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first side symbol fluctuation and the second side symbol fluctuation are configured not to be executed at the same time, and the symbol fluctuation using the special symbol (first side symbol fluctuation or second side symbol fluctuation) When the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are both “1” or more when is finished, the second side symbol variation based on the second reserved memory number is preferentially executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol variation using the special symbol (first side symbol variation or second side symbol variation) and normal symbol variation can be executed simultaneously.

[5-1. Board composition of game board]
Hereinafter, the board surface configuration of the game board will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116.
As shown in FIG. 114, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is provided at a substantially central portion of the game area 5a of the game board 5. Further, in the lower area of the center role object 2500 in the game area 5a, a first left starting opening 2002a in which a game ball hit on the left side of the center role object 2500 can be received, and the lowermost end of the game area 5a. An outlet 1003 for collecting the game balls that have flowed down to and discharging them from the game area 5a is provided.

Here, the first left starting opening 2002a is opened at the upper side, and it is possible to always accept the game ball hit on the left side of the center accessory 2500. The first left starting opening 2002a is disposed substantially in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, directly below the center portion of the stage 2530 in the center accessory 2500, and the game ball emitted from the center portion of the stage 2530. Can be accepted with a high probability. The first left starting opening 2002a is provided with a first left starting opening sensor 4002a for detecting the accepted game ball.

Further, in the area on the right side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 5a, a distribution member 2011 that alternately distributes the game balls hit on the right side of the center role object 2500 into the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, The first right starting opening 2002b and the second starting opening 2004 in which the game ball hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received, and the game ball hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are allowed to pass. And a gate portion 2003. Further, in the area on the lower right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first large winning opening 2005 and Two major winning openings 2005b are provided.

Although the details will be described later, the distribution member 2011 is a member that alternately distributes the game balls hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, and the first right starting opening. In 2002b, the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 can be received. Similarly, in the gate portion 2003, the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2022 can pass. On the other hand, the second starting port 2004 can receive the game ball distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. The general winning opening 2001, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2005b can also receive game balls that are distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. It is said that.

In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) at a predetermined portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100, but at least a center role. There is an obstacle around the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 provided in the area on the right side of the object 2500, that is, around the gate portion 2003, the first right starting opening 2002b, the second starting opening 2004, and the second special winning opening 20052005b. No nails have been planted.

[5-1-1. About distribution member]
Next, a distribution member 2011 that alternately distributes the game balls hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 into the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 will be described with reference to FIG. 115.
As shown in FIG. 115, the distribution member 2011 has two recesses each capable of holding a game ball, and positions for distributing the game ball to the first passage 2012 (FIG. 115(A)). (The position shown in FIG. 115C) and the position where the game balls are distributed to the second passage 2014 (the position shown in FIG. 115C).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 115(A), when the left-side concave portion of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward, the game ball hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 fits into the concave portion. Get stuck. Then, as shown in FIG. 115(B), in the game ball fitted in the left concave portion of the distribution member 2011, the distribution member 2011 rotates leftward due to the own weight of the game ball, and the first passage 2012. Will be released to the side. At this time, the concave portion on the right side of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115(C), when the right concave portion of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward, the game ball that has been driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 fits into the concave portion. Put in. Then, as shown in FIG. 115(D), in the game ball fitted in the recess on the right side of the distribution member 2011, the distribution member 2011 rotates rightward due to the weight of the game ball, and the second passage entrance It will be discharged to the 2013 (second passage 2014) side. At this time, the concave portion on the left side of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward.

In this way, after the game ball hit on the right side of the center character 2500 is distributed to the first passage 2012 side, the next game ball is distributed to the second passage 2014 side, and the center character object After the game ball hit on the left side of 2500 is distributed to the side of the second passage 2014, the next game ball is distributed to the side of the first passage 2012. That is, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is sure to be alternately allocated to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, and one of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014. It is designed so that multiple game balls are not continuously distributed to the side.

[5-1-2. Regarding the flow of game balls in the first passage and the second passage]
Next, the flow of the game balls distributed by the distribution member 2011 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, and FIGS. 117 and 118 are distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. It is a figure explaining the flow of the played game ball.

First, the game ball hit on the right side of the center role object 2500 passes through the right area ingress sensor 4006 before reaching the distribution member 2011. In this way, the right area entrance sensor 4006 is provided as a sensor for detecting that the game ball has entered the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500, so that the first right starting opening 2002b, the gate section 2003, and the second starting. A game ball is struck on the right side of the center role object 2500 at a preferable time (for example, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a time saving state) at which the mouth 2004, the first big prize hole 2005, and the second big prize hole 2005b should be aimed. It is possible to grasp whether or not there is.

As shown in FIG. 116, the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 pass through a funnel 2017 formed in a funnel shape. In this way, since the clune 2017 is provided before the game balls reach the constant drive door 2021, the game balls are distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011, and then the constant drive door 2021 is displayed. Although the distance to reach the constant drive door 2021 is constant, the time to reach the constant drive door 2021 is different each time. That is, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the drive door 2021 is always in the retracted state from being aimed at, and prevent the timing at which the ball can enter the first right starting opening 2002b from being aimed at.

Next, the game ball that has passed the clune 2017 flows down on the upper side of the constant drive door 2021, but when the constant drive door 2021 is in the retracted state, it enters the side of the first right start opening 2002b. On the other hand, when the constant drive door 2021 is in the protruding state, the game ball does not enter the side of the first right starting opening 2002b (the ball cannot enter the first right starting opening 2002b). It will flow down, bypassing the right side of the first right starting port 2002b. That is, when the game ball flows down on the upper side of the constant drive door 2021, pay attention to whether or not the constant drive door 2021 is in the retracted state, that is, whether or not it is possible to enter the first right start opening 2002b. be able to.

Then, the game ball that has entered the side of the first right starting port 2002b from the constant drive door 2021 has a high probability that the first right starting port 2002b is located immediately below the constant drive door 2021. Accepted by mouth 2002b. On the other hand, the game ball that was not accepted by the first right starting opening 2002b flows down either the right or left side of the first right starting opening 2002b, and the right side of the first right starting opening 2002b when the drive door 2021 is always in a protruding state. It will flow again after merging with the game ball that has flown around.

The above-mentioned first right starting opening 2002b is arranged on the side of the first passage 2012, and among the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, when the drive door 2021 is always in the retracted state. It is possible to accept a game ball that has entered inside. The first right starting opening 2002b is provided with a first right starting opening sensor 4002b for detecting the accepted game ball.

Further, the constant drive door 2021 changes between a protruding state in which it is projected forward by the constant drive solenoid 2107 and a retracted state in which it is retracted rearward. The retracted state for 04 seconds is always repeated. In this way, among the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, by making the time during which the constant drive door 2021 is in the retracted state extremely shorter than the time during which it is in the protruding state. About 2/100 always enters the inside of the drive door 2021 and is accepted by the first right starting port 2002b. Details will be described later, but during the big hit game state, a large amount of game balls are driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game balls enter the first special winning opening 2005, so about 2/100 described above. Even if so, it is possible to enter the ball into the first right starting opening 2002b during the jackpot gaming state.

Then, the game balls that have joined without being accepted by the first right starting opening 2002b pass through the gate unit 2003 with a high probability because the gate unit 2003 is arranged immediately below the joining unit. In this way, after the game balls that have not been received by the first right starting opening 2002b merge, the game balls move toward the gate portion 2003, so that the game balls can be efficiently passed through the gate portion 2003. On the other hand, the game ball that has not passed through the gate portion 2003 flows down on either the right or left side of the gate portion 2003, and joins with the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 and flows down again.

Here, the gate portion 2003 is arranged on the side of the first passage 2012, and allows the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution portion seat 2011 to pass through. This gate portion 2003 is arranged on the downstream side of the first passage 2012 with respect to the first right starting opening 2002b, and the first right starting opening regardless of whether or not a game ball has entered the inside of the drive door 2021 at all times. The first passage 2012 is formed so that the game balls that are not accepted by 2002b pass with a high probability. The gate unit 2003 is provided with a gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball that has passed.

Next, the game balls that have joined regardless of whether or not they have passed through the gate portion 2003 will be guided to the upper side of the second starting port 2004, but the passage in that part is in the lower left direction (opposite to the receiving port 2016). Since it is inclined in the direction), it does not enter the receiving port 2016 (does not allow the ball to enter the second starting port 2004) and bypasses the left side of the second starting port 2004 and flows down. It will be.

Then, the game ball that has flown around the left side of the second starting opening 2004, that is, the game ball that has flowed down the first passage 2012 but has not entered the first right starting opening 2002b is the second big winning opening 2005b. When the opening/closing member of the second special winning opening 2005 is in the retracted state, it is received by the second special winning opening 2005b. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is in the projecting state, the game ball is not received in the second special winning opening 2005b, and the second opening/closing member of the second winning opening 2005b is inclined downward to the left. A game ball will be discharged to the side of the first special winning opening 2005 along.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117, the game balls distributed to the side of the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) by the distribution member 2011 enter from the second passage entrance 2013 to the back, and enter the first passage. It flows down through the second passage 2014 (hatched portion) provided on the back side of 2012, and is discharged forward from the second passage outlet 2015. As shown in FIG. 118, the second passage 2014 is provided with a sawtooth-shaped step, but by providing such a sawtooth-shaped step, the distribution member 2011 causes the second passage inlet 2013 (first The time from when the game balls are distributed to the side of the two passages 2014) until the game balls reach the second starting opening door 2022 is different each time. That is, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the second starting opening door 2022 is in the protruding state from being aimed at and prevent the timing at which the ball can enter the second starting opening 2004 from being aimed at.

Next, the game ball discharged forward from the second passage outlet 2015 enters the reception port 2016 with a high probability because the reception port 2016 is arranged immediately below the second passage outlet 2015. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the receiving port 2016, the game ball does not enter the side of the second starting port 2004 (the ball cannot enter the second starting port 2004). It will flow down, bypassing the right side of the entrance 2016.

At this time, the game ball that has entered the receiving opening 2016 is guided to the side of the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door 2022 is in a protruding state, and is received by the second starting opening 2004. On the other hand, when the second starting opening door 2022 is in the retracted state, the game ball is not guided to the side of the second starting opening 2004 (the ball cannot enter the second starting opening 2004). , Will pass through the front of the second starting opening door 2022 in the retracted state and flow down. That is, when a game ball enters from the receiving port 2016, it is possible to pay attention to whether the second starting port door 2022 is in a protruding state, that is, whether the second starting port 2004 can enter the ball. it can. Then, such a game ball will merge again with the game ball that has flowed down bypassing the right side of the inlet 2016 and will flow down.

Here, the second starting port 2004 is arranged on the side of the second passage 2103, and enters the game ball distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, that is, the second passage entrance 203 and enters the second passage. Among the game balls released from the passage outlet 2015, the game balls enter the receiving port 2016, and it is possible to receive the guided game balls when the second starting opening door 2022 is in the protruding state. In addition, the second starting port 2004 is provided with a second starting port sensor 4004 for detecting the accepted game ball.

Further, the second starting opening door 2022 changes between a protruding state in which it is projected forward by the second starting opening solenoid 2108 and a retracted state in which it is retracted in the backward direction, and is normally in the retracted state. On the other hand, depending on the result of the ordinary determination that is drawn by the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003, that is, when the result of the ordinary determination is “universal hit”, the retracted state is changed to the protruding state. It is changing. The second starting opening door 2022 is arranged immediately below the second passage outlet 2015 and the receiving opening 2016. When the second starting opening door 2022 is in a protruding state, it is released from the second passage exit 2015 and received. It is possible to receive the game ball that has entered 2016 and guide the game ball toward the second starting port 2004 located on the left side of the second starting port door 2022. On the other hand, when the second starting opening door 2022 is in the retracted state, the second starting opening door 2022 passes through the front side of the second starting opening door 2022 without receiving the game ball discharged from the second passage exit 2015 and entering the receiving opening 2016. It is designed to fall downward.

Next, the game ball that has not flown into the second starting port 2004 while flowing down the second passage 2014 is discharged right above the second special winning port 2005b, and the opening/closing member of the second special winning port 2005 is in the retracted state. When it is, the second special winning opening 2005b is accepted. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is in the projecting state, the game ball is not received in the second special winning opening 2005b, and the second opening/closing member of the second winning opening 2005b is inclined downward to the left. A game ball will be discharged to the side of the first special winning opening 2005 along.

As described above, when the game balls are distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, it becomes possible to enter the first right starting opening 2002b and the game ball to the gate portion 2003. Is allowed to pass. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) side by the distribution member 2011, it is possible to enter the second start opening 2004. Further, the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 and the game balls distributed to the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) side are the second big winning opening 2005b. It is designed so that it does not join directly above. Therefore, when the game balls are distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, the ball cannot enter the second starting opening 2004, and the distribution member 2011 allows the second passage. When the game balls are distributed to the side of the entrance 2013 (second passage 2014), it is not possible to enter the first right starting opening 2002b or pass the game ball to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the distribution member 2011 distributes the game balls, which have been driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500, to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 alternately, so that the distribution member 2011 is provided on the first passage 2012 side. A chance to enter the right starting opening 2002b and a chance to enter the second starting opening 2004 provided on the second passage 2014 side are alternately generated. Although the details will be described later, a hit determination based on a ball entering the second starting opening 2004 is more advantageous to the player than a hit determining based on a ball entering the first right starting opening 2002b (second In the hit determination based on the ball entering the starting opening 2004, a “small hit” is performed in most cases.) Therefore, a plurality of game balls can enter the second starting opening 2004 continuously. When the state occurs, only the hit determination that is advantageous to the player is performed, which may give a disadvantage to the game manager (hall side). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center character 2500, the distribution member 2011 alternately distributes the first path 2012 and the second path 2014 to the center character. Every time a game ball is hit on the right side of 2500, a chance to enter the first right starting opening 2002b and a chance to enter the second starting opening 2004 are equally given. As a result, only the hit determination that is advantageous to the player is not performed, and the game manager (hall side) is prevented from suffering a disadvantage unilaterally.

Further, when the game balls are distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, there is a chance to enter the first right starting opening 2002b, but the drive door 2021 must always be in the retracted state. For example, the game ball does not enter the side of the first right starting port 2002b, it is not possible to enter the first right starting port 2002b. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, there is a chance to enter the second starting port 2004, but if the second starting port door 2022 is in a protruding state. If not, the game ball is not guided to the side of the second starting port 2004, and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 2004. That is, if the game balls are distributed to either the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, the game balls enter the first right starting opening 2002b or the second starting opening 2004. This is not always the case, and until the player can determine whether or not a game ball enters the first right starting opening 2002b or the second starting opening 2004, it can be noticed with anticipation.

Further, the distribution member 2011 alternately distributes the game balls hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, so the gate portion provided on the first passage 2012 side. The chance of the game ball passing through 2003 and the chance of entering the second starting opening 2004 provided on the side of the second passage 2014 are alternately generated. Here, the second starting opening 2004 makes a normal determination based on the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, and the second starting opening door 2022 protrudes when the result of the normal determination is "universal hit". It is possible to enter the ball by changing to the state. That is, unless the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003, it cannot be entered into the second starting opening 2004. In this respect, even if the game ball is directed to the gate portion 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 alternately, if the game ball is directed toward only one of the gate portion 2003 and the second starting opening 2004, for example, , Even if the game ball passes through only the gate portion 2003, the hit judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port 2004 cannot be obtained, and even if the game ball faces only at the second starting port 2004, the second The starting opening 2004 cannot be entered without being able to enter the ball, and it becomes impossible to smoothly play the game in the time saving state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center character 2500, the distribution member 2011 alternately distributes the first path 2012 and the second path 2014 to the center character. Every time a game ball is hit on the right side of 2500, the role of the first passage 2012 where the gate portion 2003 is arranged and the side of the second passage 2014 where the second starting port 2004 is arranged are made different. ing. That is, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011 so that the game ball is passed to the gate portion 2003 and then shaken. By distributing the game balls to the side of the second passage 2014 by the minute member 2011, a chance to enter the second starting opening 2004 is obtained, and the game ball that is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 is second started. It is possible to efficiently enter the ball into the mouth 2004. Therefore, even when the game balls are distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, they play a useful role in advancing the game. Since the game ball does not go to only one of the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004, the game in the time saving state can be smoothly performed.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 2004, a prize ball is paid out to the player, and the number of prize balls is “1 ball”. On the other hand, in order to perform the hit determination on the second special symbol side based on the ball entering the second starting opening 2004, the sorting member 2011 distributes the hit to the first passage 2012 side and passes through the gate portion 2003. At least "2 balls" of a game ball to be played and a game ball that is distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011 and enters the second starting opening 2004 are necessary. In addition, even if the game ball is distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, if the game ball has not entered the receiving opening 2016, or the second starting opening door 2022 is in the retracted state. , The game ball does not enter the second starting port 2004. In this way, as the number of prize balls to be paid out at the time of entering the second starting opening 2004, the number is equal to or less than “2 balls” which is at least required for the hit determination on the second special symbol side. The number of game balls held by the player is prevented from increasing even if the game balls are continuously driven to the right of the center accessory 2500.

As shown in FIG. 114, the game balls that have been driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 are distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) by the distribution member 2011. However, the game ball flowing down on either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) will be discharged directly above the second special winning opening 2005b. The second special winning opening 2005b is provided in the lower right area of the center accessory 2500. In the lower right area, the second special winning opening 2005b, the general winning opening 2001 and the second winning opening A big prize hole 2005 is provided.

Here, the general winning opening 2001 is open at the upper side, and is a game ball that has been hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (sorted to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2013 by the sorting member 2011). It may be a game ball). The general winning opening 2001 is arranged on the lower left side of the second special winning opening 2005b, and can receive the game ball released from the second special winning opening 2005b side. In addition, the general winning opening 2001 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting an accepted game ball.

Further, the first special winning opening 2005 has an opening/closing member, and when the opening/closing member is in the retracted state, a game ball that has been driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 (the first passage 2012 and the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011). It is possible to accept a game ball distributed to either side of the two paths 2013). The first special winning opening 2005 is arranged on the lower left side of the second special winning opening 2005b, and when the opening/closing member of the first special winning opening 2005 is in the retracted state, from the side of the second special winning opening 2005b. The released game ball can be accepted with a high probability. That is, as with the second big winning opening 2005b described later, since the game balls distributed to either the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2013 by the distribution member 2011 can be accepted, the first big winning is possible. When the opening/closing member of the mouth 2005 is in the retracted state, it is possible to efficiently enter the game into the first special winning opening 2005 simply by hitting the game ball on the right side of the center accessory 2500. It should be noted that the first special winning opening 2005 is provided with a first count sensor 4005a for detecting an accepted game ball.

The above-mentioned opening/closing member of the first special winning opening 2005 changes between a projecting state in which it is projected forward by the first attacker solenoid 2109 and a retracted state in which it is retracted rearward. On the other hand, depending on the result of the hit determination that is drawn by the detection of the game ball entering by the first left starting opening sensor 4002a, the first right starting opening sensor 4002b, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, That is, when the result of the hit determination is "big hit", the protruding state is changed to the retracted state.

Further, the second special winning opening 2005b has an opening/closing member, and when the opening/closing member is in the retracted state, it is possible to receive the game ball hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500. This second prize hole 2005b is arranged near the confluence of the game ball flowing down the first passage 2012 and the game ball flowing down the second passage 2013, and the opening/closing member of the second prize hole 2005b is retracted. When in the state, it is possible to accept with high probability the game balls distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2013 by the distribution member 2011. That is, when the opening/closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is in the retracted state, it is possible to efficiently enter the game into the second special winning opening 2005b simply by hitting a game ball on the right side of the center accessory 2500. The second special winning opening 2005b is provided with a second count sensor 4005b that detects an accepted game ball.

The above-mentioned opening/closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b changes between a projecting state in which it is projected forward by the second attacker solenoid 2110 and a retracted state in which it is retracted rearward. On the other hand, according to the special lottery result that is drawn by the second start opening sensor 4004 detecting the entry of the game ball, that is, when the special lottery result is “small hit”, from the protruding state It is designed to change to a retracted state.

In addition, inside the second special winning opening 2005b, a V winning device 2400 for allocating the game ball received in the second special winning opening 2005b to one of the V winning opening 2411 and the discharging opening 2412 is provided. There is. The V winning device 2400 has a rotating body 2410 capable of holding the first game ball received in the second special winning opening 2005b with the opening/closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b in the retracted state, One game ball is held in the rotating body 2410, and a V winning opening 2411 that allows the game ball to be received when the rotating body 2410 rotates to the right while one game ball is held in the rotating body 2410. In the state where the game balls are received, the second big winning opening 2005b is provided with a discharge port 2412 that allows the second and subsequent game balls to be discharged.

In other words, after the opening and closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is in the retracted state, when the first game ball is received in the second special winning opening 2005b, the first game ball is rotated by the rotating body 2410. On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls are received, the second and subsequent game balls are discharged from the discharge port 2412 without being held by the rotating body 2410. When the opening/closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is returned to the projecting state, the rotating body 2410 is rotated right by the V winning opening solenoid 2111, and one game ball held by the rotating body 2410 is the V winning opening. It will be distributed to 2411. In addition, after the rotating body 2410 is rotated to the right by the V winning opening solenoid 2111, the rotating body is rotated to the left to be returned to a position where the game ball received in the second special winning opening 2005b can be held again. ing.

From the above, depending on the special lottery result that is selected by the second start opening sensor 4004 detecting the entry of the game ball, that is, when the special lottery result is "small hit", from the protruding state It becomes possible to receive the game balls in the second withdrawal opening 2005b while changing to the withdrawal state, but during this withdrawal state (during the small hitting game state), even one game ball is the second with the second winning hole. If the player can enter the ball in 2005b, the game ball will be distributed to the V winning opening 2411 by the rotating body 2410. Then, the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening 2411, and the first V winning hole sensor 4007a and the second V winning hole sensor 4007b detect the entering of the gaming ball, which results in a "big hit (role big hit)". In the same way as when the special lottery result is "big hit", the opening/closing member of the first special winning opening 2005 is changed from the protruding state to the retracted state.

The V winning opening 2411 is provided with a first V winning opening sensor 4007a and a second V winning opening sensor 4007b as sensors for detecting a game ball passing through. Further, the outlet 2412 is provided with an outlet sensor 4008 that detects a game ball passing through. According to this, the game ball distributed to the V winning opening 2411 by the rotating body 2410 should be detected by both the first V winning opening sensor 4007a and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b. When only one of the sensors is detected, it is determined that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 2411, and fraudulent acts are prevented. Further, the total of the number of gaming balls detected by the first V winning opening sensor 4007a and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b and the number of gaming balls detected by the outlet sensor 4008 is the second count sensor 4005b. It should match the number of game balls detected by, and if these do not match, it is determined that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 2411, and fraud is prevented. doing.

As described above, the second special winning opening 2005b and the first special winning opening 2005 arranged on the lower left side of the second special winning opening 2005b are distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011. The game ball and the game ball distributed to the side of the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) are arranged in the flow path after they join. That is, both the game ball distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 and the game ball distributed to the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) side are the first major It is possible to enter the winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2005b. Therefore, although the game balls are distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) by the distribution member 2011, the distribution by the distribution member 2011 is performed. Similar to the structure of an ordinary game machine (a game machine in which a game ball is thrown into the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2005b), the second big game is opened in the big hit game state. There is no hindrance to entering the winning opening 2005b or the first big winning opening 2005 which is opened in the small hitting game state. That is, by preventing the player from unilaterally suffering the disadvantage that it is difficult to enter the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2005b, in the big hit game state and the small hit game state. I try to make the game play smoothly.

[5-2. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 114 and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in the front view, and extends in an arc shape along a clockwise circumferential direction, and extends to an upper right diagonal position after passing through a center upper end in the left and right direction in front view. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to a diagonally upper left in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to decrease toward the rear.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the inner rail 1002 and the front rail. A backflow prevention member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 includes: the outer side of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, which extends substantially vertically from the lower ends, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1008 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[5-3. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 114 and the like. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel panel 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit is attached on the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder (game panel 1100), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached ( 8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel holder of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin).

Further, the panel holder is provided with an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth in the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder, the lower rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder is opened to the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flown to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding portion 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-4. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper side and front side are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit, and are formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharge unit 1201.

[5-5. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as members having transparency so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 or the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since the mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various actions and effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 119, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator 1401 including one LED for displaying a game state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result selected by a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003. Ordinary symbol display 1402 consisting of, a normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 The first special symbol display 1403 that consists of eight LEDs that display the result of the first special lottery, and the first special hold that consists of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game balls into the first starting opening 2002. Number display 1404, a second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game balls into the second start opening 2004, and to the second start opening 2004 When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, the first special winning opening A round indicator 1407 including three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of 2005 and the second special winning opening 2005b is mainly provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, and the like of the provided LEDs.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit will be described. The peripheral control unit is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box of the back unit. The peripheral control unit is provided with a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. There is. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

[5-8. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box of the back unit. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the center of the rear wall of the back box. This game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

[6. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. 120 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 120, and FIG. 122 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency which constitute the main board. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals that are input/output to/from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 120, and FIG. FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 125 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control unit.

As shown in FIG. 120, the pachinko machine 1 has, as shown in FIG. 120, a first control unit MCG that performs a control power supply (for example, +5V) generation processing and a game-related control including payout of prize balls. , And a second control unit SCG that produces an effect related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The 2 control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[6-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on as shown in FIG. Main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor having various built-in control programs such as a main control program for controlling game operations and various commands and RAM for temporarily storing data, which are executed after A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , And a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring signs of a predetermined voltage power failure or momentary power failure.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) that monitors the operation (system) thereof, a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in Hard random number circuit 1310an"). This main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical value range (in the present embodiment, the numerical value value 0 is set as the minimum value and the maximum value is the value 32767 is preset). The predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set every time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a as one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator, which will be described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. After that, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, without overlapping other values within the predetermined numerical range. Extract one after another. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main-control-internal hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main-control MPU 1310a makes a big hit on the value extracted by the main-control internal hard-random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining a value from the main-control internal hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, which will be described later, so that various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are inputted to its various input terminals. Reset control main control output circuit 1310ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and a reset control-less main control output circuit 1310cb not provided with a reset terminal It consists of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function outputs information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by a main control system reset, which will be described later. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by the main control system reset, which will be described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 114, a first left starting opening sensor 4002a for detecting a game ball entering the first left starting opening 2002a, a first right starting opening sensor for detecting a game ball entering the first right starting opening 2002b. 4002b, a second starting opening sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting opening 2004, a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and that detects fraud using a magnet, A first count sensor 4005a that detects a game ball that has entered the one big winning opening 2005, a second count sensor 4005b that detects a game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 2005b, and a game that has entered the general winning opening 2001 A general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting a ball, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a right area entrance sensor 4006 for detecting a game ball that has entered the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and a second The V winning opening sensor 4007a and V winning opening sensor 4007b that detect the game balls assigned to the V winning opening 2411 in the special winning opening 2005b, and the discharge opening 2412 in the second special winning opening 2005b are assigned (V winning opening The detection signal from the outlet sensor 4008 that detects the game ball (not distributed to 2411) is the predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port. The signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d via the panel relay board 4161 always drives the solenoid 2107, the second starting port solenoid 2108, the first attacker solenoid 2109, the second attacker. By outputting a drive signal to the solenoid 2110 or outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is connected to the panel relay board 4161, Then, through the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reserved number display 1404, the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display The drive signal is output to the device 1401 and the round display device 1407.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. By outputting various information (game information) about the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main function with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first left starting port sensor 4002a, the first right starting port sensor 4002b, the second starting port sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the gate sensor 4003, and the right area portion entry. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the sensor 4006, the first V winning opening sensor 4007a, the second V winning opening sensor 4007b, and the outlet sensor 4008, while the general winning opening sensor 4020 is used. Uses a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first left starting opening 2002a, the first right starting opening 2002b, the second starting opening 2004, and frequently passes through the gate section 2003 and the right area section entry sensor 4006, The game ball is frequently detected by the first left starting opening sensor 4002a, the first right starting opening sensor 4002b, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the right area entrance sensor 4006. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first left starting opening sensor 4002a, the first right starting opening sensor 4002b, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the right area entrance sensor 4006. Further, when a big hit game state or a small hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2005b are opened, and the game balls frequently enter, and the second big winning. Since the game balls are frequently distributed to the V winning opening 2411 and the discharging opening 2412 in the winning opening 2005b, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the first V winning opening sensor 4007a, and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b. The detection of the game ball by the outlet sensor 4008 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the detection of the game ball by the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the first V winning opening sensor 4007a, the second V winning opening sensor 4007b, and the outlet sensor 4008 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game balls do not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 4020 does not occur frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 4020.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, so that the payout control from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is performed. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment main ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payment main ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. , Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 132) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are operation signals (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. With this as a trigger, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases it from the main control internal RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[6-2. Discharge control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of gaming balls and the like, as shown in FIG. 121, the payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout, and the operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED indicator 860b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. The operation switch 954, which also has a function as a RAM clear switch, is a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) based on a detection signal output by being operated. The RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in (.

[6-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 121, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and also pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the power was turned on. Detecting from a payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor having a ROM storing various control programs including a payout control program controlling operations and various commands, and a RAM temporarily storing data, and various detection switches related to payout. To output a drive signal to a payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, and a payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 103. Of the payout motor drive circuit 952d and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 952a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program serially outputs various information (game information) about a game from the main control board 1310 and various commands about payout as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancel navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancel command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence command and error cancel navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The signal is output as serial data of the serial method to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmitting means). In addition, this payout control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start the payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, a main frame opening command (first main frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program sends a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. In addition to outputting, when a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, and thus various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, which has a reset function for forcibly resetting the generated information, and a dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, which has no reset terminal and has no reset function. It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, in the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a payout control system reset described later, and thus the information is output. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by the payout control system reset, which will be described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

A ball-out detection sensor 827 that detects a ball out of a game ball in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball released from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are output to the payout control input circuit 952b. It is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port thereof in the serial data system, or the operation signal of the operation switch 954 (detection). Signal) to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a payout control output signal with a reset function is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to notify that effect. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payment ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the reset functionless payout control output circuit 952cb, thereby performing the payout control without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to thereby output the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. From the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, or the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the error LED indicator. By outputting the drive signal for display on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball ball" (specifically At the entrance of the distribution space that communicates with the supply passage of the dispensing device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotating body and the game ball engage in the vicinity of the entrance, and the payout rotating body becomes difficult to rotate. "Payout detection sensor error" when the number "3" is displayed (specifically, the payout detection sensor 842 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). That a “retry error” has occurred when the number “5” is displayed (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value). When the number “6” is displayed, it means “full tank” (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279). When the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6) Is notified), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (not yet paid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet) That the number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. It outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photo couplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hall) through the plurality of photo couplers. ), the number of balls of the game ball and various information (game information, error content regarding the payout operation of the game ball or the fact that there was an error) is transmitted to the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to operate. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the hall computer is used as a main control board 1310 for proceeding with the game via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and a payout control board 951 for controlling payout and the like. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

A ball lending request signal for a game ball from the ball lending button 328 and a return request signal for a prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, a frequency display plate 365, a main door relay terminal plate 880, and a terminal device connection terminal plate for playing balls, etc. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is the CR unit. It is adapted to be inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented gaming ball, and at the same time, displays a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball loan display unit 330. The equal lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365 are output, and this signal is input to the ball lending display unit 330. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is inputted through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 132) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is cut off. The various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is a predetermined signal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU 952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, judges as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function to the main control board 1310.

[6-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal connection device for lending equipment such as game balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout controller 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 122. As shown in FIG. 122, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 but also the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. The electrical connection between the boards is also relayed (more precisely, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control substrate 951, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The board with the terminal board 880 and the board with the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). In addition, AC24V described later from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (DC+12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as “+12V”) in this embodiment from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) and the ground LG. , While supplying to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, while supplying to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 ..

The frequency display plate 365 has a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball lending display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining loan display unit 363 of the ball lending unit 360.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 turns on (turns on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

The ball lending/returning display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged in a line, and one of the three-digit segment indicators is sequentially driven one by one, which is a so-called dynamic lighting method. The digit segment display is controlled to light. By such lighting control, the ball lending/returning display unit 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball lending/returning display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a 1-digit segment display out of the 3-digit segment display and the designated 1-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the content to be displayed by lighting, and CR unit 6 are terminals for connecting to a ball lending device such as game balls and a main door relay terminal. When input through the plate 880, the one-digit segment display sequentially emits light according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment displays are displayed. The content of light emitted from the container can be visually confirmed through the remaining lending display portion 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330. In the CR unit lamp 365d, the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creating circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball loan display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or similar lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment, which corresponds to 100 yen in amount) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input is EXS, which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has started or ended, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, is connected to the rental device connection terminal board for game balls and the like. It outputs to CR unit 6 via 869. Note that, for example, when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, a game ball for 200 yen is paid out, and when a clerk in the hall or the like presets the CR unit 6, the payout operation is performed once. It is supposed to be performed twice consecutively, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball or other lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls dispensed as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[6-3. Power board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 is provided with a power supply switch 934 capable of electrically connecting and disconnecting AC 24V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and a power supply control unit 935 for generating various power supplies. The firing control unit 953 controls the firing by the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[6-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility by operating the power switch 934 and the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying various substrates from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c. And a power generation circuit 935d that generates a power source.

[6-3-2. Firing controller]
A firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a, an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and the palm of the handle 302. A detection signal from a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether to forcibly stop the launch (launch) of a game ball according to the player's intention. And the detection signal from the input terminal are input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal indicating that fact is input via the payout control board 951. ..

The firing control circuit 953a controls the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and outputs the adjusted drive current to the launch solenoid 682. Meanwhile, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the dish unit 320, The game ball received by the ball sending member is controlled to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[6-4. Peripheral control board]
In the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control section SCG, as shown in FIG. 123, for the first control section MCG, performance control is performed based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and 19 and the peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data) with the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460, while controlling sound such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information that specifies the date, hours, minutes, seconds. And a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information that identifies the time, and the knob unit that rotates the volume of music or sound effect that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. And a volume control volume 1510a for adjusting the volume.

[6-4-1. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed at power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from power-on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP from a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information that continues over the peripheral control unit steady process executed every time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LED light emission modes, etc.) Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information for managing schedule data and the like for defining, and various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of a jackpot gaming state and special information). Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing effect flags, and peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT 1511e" for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally). ]) is provided.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored content only for a time such that an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long power failure occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply substrate 931. By doing so, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 931, when the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and when this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and therefore is not reset.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Lamp light emitting data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp from a lamp drive board serial I/O port through a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serial for the motor drive board. Door side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit and outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door frame. Door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of No. 3 is output from the peripheral I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED for peripheral control. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the rendering operation unit 400, and a press detection switch for detecting operation of the press operation unit 405. Detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized production operation unit detection data is output from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, and is input to the production operation unit detecting serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are provided on the motor drive board 4180, which is not shown in the figure. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit through the peripheral control input circuit to the motor control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU1511a. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input/output of the motor drive board serial I/O port.

Note that the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e together. Is diagnosed.

[6-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 124, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa as the center, a peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads/writes various data from/into the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while at the same time, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control internal WDT 1511af, Peripheral control Various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak are read/written via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 1511b through the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read. Then, various data is read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and peripheral control various parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the I/O port 1511ag and the input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ DMA3 has four channels.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control built-in serial I/O ports 1511ae and a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af. , Peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, in order to independently perform data transfer without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. Further, while reading/writing from/to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and Reading/writing is performed on an input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I/Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to perform data transfer independently, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and other storage devices are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h, while various peripheral control various types are performed. For peripheral I/O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai are used. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 1511d and various input/output devices such as peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I/O ports 1511ae include serial I/O ports for lamp drive boards, serial I/O ports for motor drive boards, serial I/O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier board motors, frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs. Serial I/O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port, a main control board serial I/O port, and a production operation unit information acquisition serial I/O port.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. It has become. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires) to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and resets the signal. Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that it is not reset.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and a game. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial signals are serialized. It outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag are electrically directly connected, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in games. It should be noted that the LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotating position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, so that music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to game performance are announced. (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered as a more powerful one, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will shift to an advantageous game state for the player). Of the notification sound and the notification sound of the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound have a mechanism of flowing without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The sound volume can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into seven stages described above, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. Thus, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume low, the effect sound such as the music or the sound effect that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is generated. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is out of order or when the player is conducting an illegal act, the notification sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while There is a possibility that the volume played is increased and music and sound effects are added, and the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered more powerful, or a game state advantageous to the player is entered. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[6-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, etc., various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a driving mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-sequentially arraying light emission data that defines light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effect is to be incorporated is defined. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some of them are read and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some, the copied one is read out.

Further, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 is corrected according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to secular change of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the LED type backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described below, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance. The brightness setting information is, as will be described later, brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the current setting. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the set game board side effect display device 1600 is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is also acquired. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75%, the brightness of 80% is obtained by adding 5% which is the correction information acquired to this 75%. As described above, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. When December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the game board side effect display device is displayed. When the backlight of 1600 is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85% which is obtained by adding 10% which is the correction information acquired to 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[6-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 124, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that stores, among the various types of information updated by execution of various control programs, the backup target. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in this backup management target work area 1511ca, and a peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy areas 1511cd for exclusively storing the copied various control programs and various data, various control data and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce stored exclusively, and a backup non-management target work area 1511cf that stores only various information that is not a backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs, Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 146) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on starts the RAM clear effect. And the game state (for example, to instruct the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 127 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is input. ) Is dedicatedly stored as a backup target, and the performance information (1 ms) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later is backed up. It is composed of Bank 0 (1 ms) which is exclusively stored as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly described. "Bank" is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information, and is "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It is meant to have a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” means that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a. Since the V blank signal which tells that it is in a state of being able to accept the screen data from is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in other words, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) From the place where the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effect described later. The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As will be described later, "(1ms)" means that the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, so that "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", And "Bank4" (also used for production information (1 ms) and production backup information (1 ms) described later with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) has a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is set. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is a storage area in which a received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 and stores the received various commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae is set. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and in other cases, various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. There are also things that are set.

In Bank 0 (1 ms), a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. A storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is a storage area in which the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies are set, and detection operation signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai. Various information obtained by rotating (rotating direction) the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on the above (for example, a dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400). Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like) are set in the storage area. In the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged around. When the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and It is a storage area in which various kinds of information acquired regarding the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects during connection with the effect display drive substrate 4450 are set.

It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Every time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady process is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control section steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the door side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It The peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second region of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage region 1511cab in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed last time, the processing is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Is becoming

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is provided with a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -When DAT is set and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When it is set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time is set. The processing is carried out based on this.

When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag Sometimes, when the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It is like this.

Next, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store the copied copy of the effect information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the performance information (1 ms) which is the content which is copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. As performance backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac controls the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), which are managed as one page in total. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed. The page consistency is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. It is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. It is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), that is, two pairs in total. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Contents that are copied at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc every time the regular processing is executed, and are also stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area that is normally used. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is designed to perform high-speed copying, but the programs for executing the high-speed copy by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[6-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs, A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on status commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including power failure due to momentary power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 146). Is for instructing the RAM clear effect start and the game state (for example, for instructing the effect start when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 120 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even when) is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are zero-cleared. Further, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state). While the contents can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 1511da is production information (SRAM) that is various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit game state and a special production flag). (For example, information) is stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit indicating the size of the storage area for storing various types of information, and is "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511db to a backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It is meant to have a size. Since "(SRAM)" is a backup target for various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3". , And “Bank4” (also used for production information (SRAM) and production backup information (SRAM) described later with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc that exclusively store the copied copy of the production information (SRAM) that is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair and one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

The backup second area 1511dc has Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[6-4-2. LCD display controller]
As shown in FIG. 123, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and the sound control such as the music and the sound effect that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. In addition, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”), and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with a built-in sound source and various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various sounds such as music and sound effects. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and serializing to the door frame side effect display device 460. The rendered drawing data is directed to the effect display drive board 4450 which is arranged near the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. A door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d for transmitting, and a differential circuit 1512e for differentiating LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 into a plus signal and a minus signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is transmitted. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected so that the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. I have it. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b displays, for example, ring image data used to display a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) as sprite data used to display screens and images described later, and an operation menu background image described later. The operation menu background image data to be used, the selection display object image data used to display at least one selection display object described later, the tone adjustment background image data used to display the volume adjustment screen including the volume scale described below, and the volume adjustment icon described below. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the body frame backside image data used for displaying the bodyframe backside image in which the position of each part on the backside of the bodyframe 4 can be visually seen from the player, and the display of the service mode screen The service mode screen image data used for, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After the data is extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the first screen data is generated according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae when a V blank signal described later is input. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, outputs the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The extracted sound command data is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral. After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the V blank signal is input, and the first data is generated according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is input with the V blank signal for the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one.

[6-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. Side character data and upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data to generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. A VRAM for doing so is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. Performance display that is arranged near the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 are Although attached to the game board 5, the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short, but the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is as described above. Since the control board 1510 outputs to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d for the door frame side effect "V-by-One (indicated by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. By adopting a differential type communication called "registered trademark"", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise.

The channel CH1 uses a differential interface by a serial method called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses an interface by a parallel method. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and is housed in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive substrate 4450. Then, various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, On the basis of the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data, and one screen (1 for displaying on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 The drawing data of the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side The image display data for the effect display device 460 is supplied from the channel CH2 to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means the drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also shows image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps for a second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Also, in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent.

The VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" holds drawing data for one screen (one frame) drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting the sound data such as sound effect and sound effect and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effect are embedded in the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a have sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-mentioned substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels of the internal sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source have a plurality of master volume values. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the master volume value, which is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified to the master volume value. Is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The set volume control volume 1510a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually compared with the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To the master volume value, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the informative sound, the sound data of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used and the use The maximum volume which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to a master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Here, in the case where the effect sound is being output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of sending the notification sound to notify the clerk in the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct to the pachinko machine 1 will be simply described. To explain, first, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track containing the effect sound to mute, and the sound data of the track incorporating this effect sound, the sub-volume value set to the mute, and the notification sound. The sound data of the track in which is embedded and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually combined with the speaker 921. And the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After the predetermined period has elapsed, the notification sound is forcibly set to silence. The volume of the effect sound that is proceeding according to the schedule data is adjusted again by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a and the adjusted board volume is set again as the sub volume value (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 is performed. If the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set when the mode is changed to the setting mode by operating the section 401 or the pressing operation section 405, the sound is played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

In this way, when the effect sound is being output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the alarm sound is output to notify the clerk or the like in the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, the effect is generated. Although the volume of the sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, since the effect sound that has been muted progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound has passed a predetermined period. When the sound stops flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound started to flow, but progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the notification sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from.

[6-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as shown in FIG. 125, for drawing the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. And the upper plate side character data are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[6-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and the frame peripheral relay as the serial data of the differential method in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and also as left-side audio data as positive/negative differential serial data. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right difference systems between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a plus signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component carried on the positive signal and the noise component carried on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[6-4-2d. Door frame side production transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 125, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses the parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. The green video signal, the blue video signal, and the blue video signal each have 8 bits, that is, 24 bits in total. In the present embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, that is, 18 bits in total, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalid although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

Three video signals that are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, that is, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals that are a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. Signal and clock signal and three synchronization signals are serialized into differential serial signals (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. and only a differential 1 pair cable is used. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source includes the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first Since the length of the wiring required for the second route) is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the first route, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported on the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 so as to be openable and closable, the door frame 3 is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, on the main body frame 4 side such as the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3 from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided to the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 also plays the game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can guide the paid out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank is full is arranged. Further, below the main body frame 4, there is arranged a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility is integrated into a unit. As described above, various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment where it receives noise that has entered the.

Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data becomes extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, " By adopting differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)”, the structure is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to be described later included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and As described above, the differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel lines provided in parallel. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where parallel lines are adopted as the differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 Even if a mechanism that is difficult to be affected by noise is adopted by adopting differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of a stock company, a static electricity discharge of a game ball is caused only by such a hardware configuration. If serial data on parallel lines is affected by noise, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., a performance display stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 Since noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as irregular data different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a so-called sandstorm appears. However, there is a problem that such an image is displayed and it is impossible to recognize what the image is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and the channel frame side of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source has a door frame side provided to the peripheral control board 1510. In the transmitter IC for rendering 1512d, differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make the mechanism less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration, Then, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. Adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame effect effect display device 460. By doing so, the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. By canceling (removing) noise, it is possible to prevent an image that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is like a sandstorm from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game due to the influence of noise.

In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described below included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are described. A frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between and, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but are separately assembled, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, electrically connecting various wirings such as harnesses and twisted cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the door frame 3 is removed from the body frame 4 to perform maintenance of the body frame 4 and the door frame 3. If it can be done and the problem that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 instead of the defective door frame 3 and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3'side The substrate can be electrically connected.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to such a hardware configuration, even if serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) Is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, The power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are respectively formed with the above-described video transmission wiring patterns separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. In the path from the transmitter to the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are straddled, so that the video transmission formed on these plural relay terminal boards. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The board of the terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the wiring of the power source and other various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Although one of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, the wiring for supplying power to the harness is red and the other wirings are gray. .. Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[6-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is supplied to the compulsory switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is adapted to be transmitted to the stored effect display drive substrate 4450. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the forced switching circuit 1512f also outputs LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Are differentially input into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is demonstrated by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period in which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. During the period of operation, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are provided. Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connection of the,, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit these two signals when two signals, which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, are input, while the differential circuit 1512f is differentially connected. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the digitizing circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are connected in a circuit. Has been done. As a result, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuits are connected so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are transmitted. , From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while being transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e. When the two signals that are differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and therefore the door frame side effect transmitter. A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 while the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or in a customer waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which will be described later, and is serialized. It is mainly configured by a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V which restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and when it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to that effect to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

In addition, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 via the. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not defective when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 is detected. While it can be determined that the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the 320 is not defective, when the LOCKN signal is not input, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. It is determined that the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 has a problem, and a notification image (for example, "a problem occurs in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device" is notified. "Please call a clerk.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and at the same time, a notification sound (for example, "a malfunction occurs in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device"). ") is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound is output from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. Thereby, it is possible to perform the notification by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[6-4-3. RTC controller]
As shown in FIG. 123, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is adapted to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without being supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above. Based effects can be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As such an effect, for example, if it is December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or if it is New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds the brightness setting information of the LED when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with the LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the LED brightness, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the currently set game. The board side effect display device 1600 and the brightness of the LED as the backlight of the door frame side effect display device 460 are included.

In addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information as the information of the year, month, day, hour, minute and second stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is set to ON/OFF control of the backlight or only ON. It is supposed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date/time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year in which the input date and time information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time which is month and day and hour, minute and second.

As described above, in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the brightness setting information and the input date/time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and held independently of model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, probability of occurrence of jackpot gaming state with low probability or high probability).

The brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set to the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information are reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. The brightness can be adjusted. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with the LED type, the game board side effect is displayed. A decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and the calendar information and the time for identifying the date. Time information specifying minutes and seconds is acquired to specify the current date and time, and the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% is adjusted in 5% steps. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is currently set is acquired. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance.

For example, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75%, this 75% is set. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% which is obtained by further adding 5% which is the acquired correction information. When 12 months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, a value of 85% is added to the 75%, which is the correction information acquired. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is obtained.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information specifying the date and the time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[6-4-4. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of the music, the sound effect, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and the peripherally-controlled A/D converter 1511ak electrically connected to the volume portion 1510a has a knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 levels are divided into 7 and managed as the substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity on the pachinko machine 1, and a game effect. The contents related to, etc. (for example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered as a more powerful one, or it is highly likely that the game state is advantageous to the player) Etc.) also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound have a mechanism that does not depend on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion at all. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into seven stages described above, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. Thus, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume low, the effect sound such as the music or the sound effect that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is generated. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is out of order or when the player is conducting an illegal act, the notification sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while It is advantageous for the player to make the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to be more powerful in addition to increasing the volume of sound that is played and to add to music and sound effects. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility that a game state will be entered.

In the present embodiment, the volume of music and sound effects are adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and in addition to the dial operating unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400, By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music or sound effect. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and Then, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effect is included in a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of, the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and notification sound is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods: a case where the volume of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. Then, the store clerk in the hall can rotate the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and cannot hear the music or the sound effect, or the player may feel the music or the sound effect is noisy. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, within a predetermined time, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, or the customer waits for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period in which the operation is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music or effect sound can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thereby, the player can adjust the volume of the music or the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when it is difficult for the clerk in the hall to hear the adjusted sound volume and hear the music or the sound effect, the effect operation unit 400 is required. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to increase the volume to a desired level, and when the hall clerk feels the volume adjusted to be high and the music or the sound effect is noisy, the effect operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired volume.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, becomes a customer waiting state, and is repeatedly demonstrated by the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player, who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game, feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and last time, sit down on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 to play the game. If the player feels the adjusted volume to be loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time uses the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or The pressing operation section 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[7. Commands related to transmission/reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. 126 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 127 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 127, and FIG. 129 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[7-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensors 4002a and 4002b, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When signals are input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko machine 1 and driving the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to store the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322. When a device for paying out game balls as a ball rental) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 126(a), the main control board The prize ball command transmitted from the 1310 to the payout control board 951 includes commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number). In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated, and the command 11H. In the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as storage balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as ball rental balls) are installed adjacent to a game hall (hall). 1 is electrically connected to the ball lending machine (such a pachinko machine is referred to as "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 126(b), the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. The command 20H to the command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the player. The command 20H designates one prize ball, the command 21H designates two prize balls,... 15 balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 126(c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and the self-check is designated in this command 30H.
By transmitting the command 30H and checking whether or not the ACK signal is input, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after transmitting the command. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[7-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode showing a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the various commands include special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure tuning effect related, ordinary electric figure effect related, notification display, status It is divided into display and other.

[7-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 127, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 127, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Concerning the first special symbol display 1403, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state designation. To these various commands, “A*H” is assigned as the status and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) is for instructing the start of special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (variation pattern) designated by the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is a deviation, a specific jackpot, The non-specific jackpot is designated, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command is an instruction to end the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the variation state designation command is to instruct a game state. The gaming state is composed of a time saving state that indicates a time saving state and a non-time saving state (normal game state) that indicates not being a time saving state. Here, in the time saving state, for example, the time for displaying the ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol display device 1402 in a variable display is shortened compared to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), and the stop display is performed in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result. By doing so, the number of times stop display of the ordinary lottery result in the later-described ordinary lottery in the predetermined time is increased as compared with the non-time saving state, and further, the period during which the second starting opening door 2022 is projected is set to the non-time saving state (normal Compared with (gaming state), a state in which a lottery opportunity for special symbols can be obtained without reducing the number of balls held by increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of gaming balls to the second starting opening 2004 by making it longer (in other words Then, as compared with the non-time saving state, more decisions are made as to whether or not the second starting opening door 2022 should be projected, and when the second starting opening door 2022 is projected, the second starting opening door 2022 is projected. It is a state in which the acceptance rate (entering rate) of the game balls into the second starting opening 2004 is increased by lengthening the operation period. Even if the time saving state ends and the normal game state (non-time saving state) is controlled when the second starting opening door 2022 is in the protruding state, the second starting opening 2004 is previously stored in the second starting opening 2004. When a predetermined number of game balls are not accepted, the protruding state can be maintained even after being controlled to the normal game state (non-time saving state). However, in the normal game state (non-time saving state), when the predetermined closing condition (a predetermined number of game balls have been accepted or a preset opening time has elapsed) is satisfied, the maintained protrusion The state ends and the state is changed to the retracted state.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the time saving state, when the player hits the right side, the game ball is placed in the winning opening such as the first right starting opening 2002b or the second starting opening 2004. When the expected value for winning a prize ball expected to be paid out is compared with the amount of ball required to obtain the expected value for winning a prize ball, It is set to be larger. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable for the player not to carry out a new launch of the game ball when, for example, in the situation where the number of holdings of the big hit determination has reached the upper limit while being controlled to the time saving state. ..

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 1 variation, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the special figure 1 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process of step S16 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[7-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization performance related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 120, and the division thereof is as shown in FIG. Concerning the second special symbol display 1405, it is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. To these various commands, “B*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) is for instructing the start of special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 specification command is out, specific jackpot, The non-specific jackpot is designated, and the end of special figure 2 tuning effect is an instruction to end the special figure 2 tuning effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 2 variation, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, and the special figure 2 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[7-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 127, the category of big hit related, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N times display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending command. To these various commands, “C*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The big hit opening command is an instruction to start the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening Nth time display command starts during the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 15th rounds (first big winning opening 2005 Nth opening). The opening of the round or the opening of the round) is instructed, and the special winning opening 1 closing display command is the start of closing the big winning opening 1 between the rounds (the closing of the first winning opening 2005 between the rounds or the start of closing). ), and the special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of 0 to 10 game balls has been counted (first detected by the first count sensor 4005a shown in FIG. 120, The number of gaming balls entered into the special winning opening 2005) is transmitted, the big hit ending command is an instruction to start the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is an instruction to display the big hit symbol information. is there.

Further, the small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is started during the small hit opening (during the small win, the second big winning opening 2005b is opened or the opening is started). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium-large prize hole winning effect (the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 2005b during the small hit is detected by the second count sensor 4005b). The small hit ending command is an instruction to start a small hit ending.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command is the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 15th rounds (first big winning opening The special winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the Nth round of 2005 is opened), and when the special winning opening 1 is closed (closing of the first special winning opening 2005 is started), the special winning opening 1 count is displayed. The command is when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the big winning opening 1 is changed (when the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, and the game ball entered in the first big winning opening 2005 is detected by the first count sensor 4005a). When it is detected), the big hit ending command is sent when the big hit ending is started, and the big hit symbol display command is sent when the big winning opening is opened (when the first big winning opening 2005 is opened).

Also, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (when the second big winning opening 2005b is opened during the small hit), and the small hit count is counted. The display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium to large winning opening (when the game ball that entered the second big winning opening 2005b during the small hit is detected by the second count sensor 4005b), and the small hit ending command Is transmitted when the small hit ending is started. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process of step S16 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[7-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 127, the category of power-on is composed of a command at the time of power-on and a command of the main control return destination at power-on. A status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command is for instructing the RAM clear effect start and the game state. The power-on state command is for the payout control board 951 illustrated in FIG. Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and information at the time of power-on (including power-on, power recovery when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored) .), information indicating which of the above-described time saving state and non-time saving state is used for recovery, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine is, for example, when creating a so-called Max type, Middle type, and Sweet Digi type, which game copyright it belongs to, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability variation occurs). And, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in the state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine) or the like. In other words, the model code information of the pachinko machine is the series code for specifying which type is the max type, the middle type, or the sweet digital type, which indicates the model type, and the copyright of the work. In addition to the copyright code and the game specification (for example, if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs, in addition to the probability change with a limited number of changes in the special symbol) And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which

The power-on main control return destination command instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command indicates information indicating the driving state of the second starting opening solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 120 and the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2109 and the second attacker solenoid 2110 shown in FIG. It mainly consists of information to instruct.

As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control recovery destination command, when the main control board power is turned on Including.) is sent. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, a power-on state command and a power-on main command in the initialization process of step S1 in the main control side game control main process described later. A control return destination command is transmitted.

[7-2-5. Normal figure synchronization production related]
The general figure synchronization effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 120, and the division thereof is, as shown in FIG. 127, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 120. Concerning the device 1402, it is composed of commands named general figure synchronization effect start, general figure designation, general figure synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. These various commands are assigned status "E*H" and mode "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The universal figure synchronization effect start command (universal figure variation pattern command) is an instruction to start the universal figure entrainment effect with the production pattern (general figure variation pattern) specified in the mode. The big hit and non-specific big hit are designated, the universal figure synchronization effect end command is an instruction to end the universal figure synchronization effect, and the variation state designation command is to instruct a game state. As described above, the gaming state includes a time saving state that indicates a time saving state and a non-time saving state (normal game state) that indicates not being a time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol variation start, the universal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the universal figure synchronization effect starts, and the universal figure synchronization effect end command is It is transmitted when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the regular symbol is fixed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the universal symbol winning/losing information is designated. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the normal symbol command control process of step S17 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[7-2-6. Normal electric role production related]
The normal electric role effect-related relates to the second starting opening door 2022 which is advanced and retracted by the driving of the second starting opening solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 120, and its division is, as shown in FIG. It consists of an opening command, a display of the public train, and a command called the ending of the map. These various commands are assigned status "F*H" and mode "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The universal figure opening command is for instructing the opening of the universal figure, and the universal battery open display command is for starting the universal battery open (the second starting opening door 2022 is driven forward by the second starting opening solenoid 2108). In the state of protruding to the end, or when projecting, the ending command for universal figure is an instruction to start ending for universal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure opening command is transmitted at the start of the universal figure opening, and the universal battery open display command is transmitted when the universal battery is opened (the second starting opening door 2022 is the second starting opening solenoid 2108). When the ending command for the universal figure starts, the ending command for the universal figure is transmitted when the ending command for the universal figure starts. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the normal symbol command control process of step S17 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[7-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 128, the categories of the notification display are made up of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. A status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The prize abnormality display command is when the game ball enters the first prize hole 2005 or the second prize hole 2005b when the player wins the prize hole other than during the big hit (condition device is operating) When the count sensor 4005 detects the game ball), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, a path extending between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. In the case where there is an electrical connection abnormality in, an instruction to start the connection abnormality notification is given, and the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensors 4002a and 4002b, and the second start. When the disconnection/short circuit of the electrical connection with the mouth sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, etc. occurs, it is an instruction to start the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display The command gives an instruction to start the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG.

Further, the door opening command is issued by the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input through the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is in the opened state, the door frame is instructed to notify the door opening, and the door frame closing command closes the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. When the door is in the opened state, the end of the door opening notification is instructed. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is issued to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input through the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the case where the main body frame 4 is opened, the main body frame closing command is issued, and the main body frame closing command is based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the prize-winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the special winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Is sent when there is no ACK response (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to the first start opening sensor 4002a, 4002b, the second start opening sensor 4004, the first start opening sensor 4004, It is transmitted when any of the count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, etc. is in a disconnection or short circuit state, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted by the switch process of step S12 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[7-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 128, the status display section is made up of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to error cancellation command) and frame status 2 command. There is. A status of “7*H” and a mode of “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951. Detailed description thereof will be given later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 128, “7*H” is set. The status is set as well as the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds the additional information “7*H” to these received commands. Is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The shaped frame status 1 command is sent at power restoration, when the frame status is changed, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation nav command is sent at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the frame status 2 command at power restoration. , And when the frame status changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted by the switch process of step S12 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[7-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 128, the test-related section is made up of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. , Which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control section 1511, the liquid crystal display control section 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 123). Various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194 are inspected.

As the transmission timing of the test command, the RAM is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on, and is transmitted at times other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when a power failure or momentary power failure is restored, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, a main control side game control main, which will be described later, is described. A test command is transmitted in the initialization process of step S1 in the process.

[7-2-10. Other]
In the other categories, as shown in FIG. 128, the starting mouth winning, the variation shortening operation end designation, the special symbol 1 memory, the special symbol 2 memory, the special symbol type prefetch, the variable pattern prefetch, the gate passage, the normal symbol memory, the ordinary symbol It is composed of commands with the names of pattern type prefetching and general pattern variation pattern prefetching. A status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The starting mouth winning command is for instructing to start the starting mouth winning effect, and in the case where the game ball enters the first starting mouths 2002a and 2002b based on the detection signals from the first starting mouth sensors 4002a and 4002b. The start of the effect and the start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 are respectively instructed, and the fluctuation reduction operation end designation is made. The command is for instructing a state transition from the fluctuation shortening operating state to the fluctuation shortening non-operating state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is the special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (the first starting opening 2002a, 2002b a game ball. Is to convey the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol (reserved number) on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, and the special symbol 2 memory command is special. 0 to 4 symbols 2 (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 (the number of reserves )) is transmitted, the special symbol type prefetch command, before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the special symbol is prefetched and its special The display result by the first special symbol display 1403 based on the symbol 1 hold (outlier symbol, big hit symbol), and the special symbol 2 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400. Before, the pre-reading and the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold (small hit symbol, big hit symbol), and, respectively, to specify, the variation pattern look-ahead command, the special symbol Before the 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the look-ahead pattern and the variation pattern used for the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 hold, Before the special symbol 2 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, the change pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol based on the look-ahead and the special symbol 2 hold And, respectively. Further, the gate passage command is for instructing the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is 0 to 4 ordinary symbol reservations (the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 to display the function display unit. Normal symbol display 1402 of 1400 is to convey the number of balls not yet used in the variable display of the normal symbol (the number of holdings)), and the normal symbol type prefetch command is the normal symbol of the normal symbol holding function display unit 1400. Before being used for the variable display of the ordinary symbols on the display device 1402, the display result (the deviating symbol, the symbol per ordinary symbol) by the ordinary symbol display device 1402 based on the prefetching and the normal symbol reservation is designated, The figure variation pattern prefetch command, before the normal symbol hold is used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400, it is used in advance for the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal symbol hold. It is used to specify the universal pattern fluctuation pattern.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is the starting opening winning command (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002a, 2002b based on the detection signals from the first starting opening sensors 4002a, 4002b). Or when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004), mainly from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The change reduction operation end designation command is transmitted by voice to notify that effect, and is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the stoppage stop period) after the fluctuation is fixed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been exhausted. The memory command is a special symbol 1 operation holding ball number change (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002a, 2002b and the holding number increases, or from the holding number, a special special symbol display 1403 It is transmitted when the number of holdings used for variable display of symbols decreases), and the special symbol 2 memory command is when the number of special symbols 2 operation holding balls changes (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004). When the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves decreases from the number of reserves used for variable display of special symbols on the second special symbol display device 1405), the special symbol type look-ahead command is a special symbol. 1, 2 when the operation reserve ball number increases (when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002a, 2002b or the second starting port 2004 and the number of holdings increases), the variation pattern look-ahead command is a special symbol Sent immediately after the type prefetch command is transmitted. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process of step S16 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

In addition, the gate passage command is transmitted when the game ball passes to the gate unit 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is when the number of normal symbol operation holding balls changes (the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the hold number increases. At the time, or when the number of reservations is normally used in the variable display of the normal symbol display 1402 and the number of reservations is reduced), it is transmitted to the normal symbol type prefetch command, when the number of normal symbol operation holding balls increases ( When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the number of holdings increases, the general pattern variation pattern prefetch command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol type prefetch command is transmitted. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the normal symbol command control process of step S17 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is when the starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002a, 2002b based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensors 4002a, 4002b, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004), the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are mainly transmitted by voice to notify that effect. However, how the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 123 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a specification that the pachinko machine 1 is used not only to notify by voice from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-port winning command and does not notify by voice from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[7-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 129, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is made up of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2; frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

The frame status 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) is prepared for out of ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, abnormal connection and CR not connected, and bit 0 (B0, "B") when out of ball Represents a bit.), the value 1 is set in the full tank, the value 1 is set in the bit 1 (B1), the value 1 is set in the bit 2 (B2) in 50 or more stocks, and the connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. A value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7 in bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command.

The error clear navigation command (corresponding to the error clear command) includes a ball spill, a payout detection sensor error, and a retry error. On error, bit 3 (B3) is set to the value 1, and on retry error, bit 4 (B4) is set to the value 1. Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 127 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that the payout of game balls that are not consistent due to the retry operation has been repeatedly performed. The bit (B0), the bit (B1), and the bit 5 (B5) to the bit 7 (B7) of the error canceling navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, and a value 1 for B6. The value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared for the ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during the ball removal. In bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, when the frame state is changed, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation and the frame status 2 command. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame status changes.

[8. Game contents]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 130 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are stored. , Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side (left hit) or the right side (right hit) of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, that is, , You can hit a game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls serve as obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates by abutting the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 toward the left side in front view from the highest part, while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, the first left starting opening 2002a is located immediately below, so that it is received in the first left starting opening 2002a with a high probability. When the game balls are received in the first left starting opening 2002a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. It

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged into the game area 5a from other than the center, the game ball flows down toward the first left starting opening 2002a. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first left starting opening 2002a.

By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, there is a possibility that the game ball is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by an obstacle nail or the like and received in the first left starting opening 2002a. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball struck in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right-handed), On the downstream side, the region (specific region) where the first right starting port 2002b, the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003, etc. are provided flows down. A distribution member 2011 that distributes the game balls to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 alternately is provided on the upstream side of the specific area, and the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011. Is allowed to be received in the first right starting opening 2002b and passing through the gate portion 2003, and the game balls distributed to the second passage 2014 by the distributing member 2011 can be received in the second starting opening 2004. It is supposed to be.

When the game ball hit to the right in this way passes through the gate portion 2003, the main control board 1310 normally determines. In this normal judgment, if the winning symbol is won per normal symbol, and the corresponding selection is shown in the normal symbol fluctuation, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 is moved forward and protruded to the player side (projection). (State), the game ball that has passed through the receiving opening 2016 is received by the second starting opening door 2022 and can be received in the second starting opening 2004. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

In addition, in the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, when the general figure is won, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 is retracted after the ordinary symbol stops in the manner of the general drawing. Then, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 enters the game board 5 (retracted state). However, even if the predetermined time has not elapsed after operating the second starting opening door 2022 to the protruding state, the predetermined upper limit number (1 ball in this example) of the game balls Is received in the second starting port 2004, at that time, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 is moved backward to operate in the retracted state, so that the game ball cannot be received in the second starting port 2004. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball is received in the first starting opening (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b) or the second starting opening 2004, In the control board 1310, a hit determination (first special) for generating an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit game state", "small hit game state", "time saving state", etc.) The symbol side, or the second special symbol side) is performed. If you win the big hit in the hit determination, determine the big hit type based on the symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number)) acquired at the time of entering the ball, A gaming privilege (a big-hit gaming state or a gaming state after the big-hit gaming state) corresponding to the determined big-hit (determined big-hit type) is given. Similarly, if you win the small hit in the hit determination, the small hit type is determined based on the symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number)) acquired at the time of entering the ball However, a gaming privilege (small hitting gaming state, a big hitting gaming state executed when a V prize is won in the small hitting gaming state, after a big hitting gaming state) corresponding to the small hit (determined small hitting type) of the determined type Game state) is provided.

When the hit determination is performed, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is variably displayed only for the variation time selected based on the result of the corresponding determination, and then the symbol aspect according to the result ( By stopping the special symbol with the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol, the player can recognize the special symbol. As a result, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is not the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol, the starting condition for the next hit determination will be satisfied, and the main control board 1310 will be satisfied. In the special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol) that are held in an unexecuted state, the hit judgment with the highest digestion order will be digested (executed).

On the other hand, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a big hit symbol, a big hit game state in which a player can obtain a prize is performed on the main control board 1310. .. When executing the big hit game state, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the big hit game state is performed is generated. Then, when this opening period ends, the prescribed number of rounds that is predetermined according to the determined jackpot type (in the present embodiment, 10 or 15 rounds when the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the second A round game is performed in which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened (the first special winning opening 2005 is set in a state in which a game ball can be accepted) with an upper limit of 15 rounds when the special symbol is a big hit symbol. One round game is until the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 2005 is performed a predetermined number of times (in the present embodiment, once), and a prescribed number ( Upper limit number of winnings: Until the game balls of 9 balls in this example are won, or until the specified time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) has elapsed, it is released. In the round game, a round effect is performed. Then, when the round game of the specified number of rounds is finished, an ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game state is performed is generated, and when the ending period is finished, the big hit game state is finished. To be done.

If the stopped special symbol (the second special symbol in this example) is a small hit symbol, a small hit game state in which a player can win a prize is performed on the main control board 1310. In executing the small hitting game state, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the small hitting game state is performed is generated. Then, when this opening period ends, the second special winning opening 2005b is opened (the second special winning opening 2005b is set in a state in which a game ball can be received). In the form, it is performed once). During a single open game, until a specified number (upper limit number of prizes: 9 balls in this example) of game balls enter the second big winning opening 2005b, or a specified time (open game time: 28 in this example). It will be released until 0.5 seconds). In the opening game, an opening effect is performed. Then, when the opening game of the specified number of times of opening is finished, an ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the small hitting game state is performed is generated, and when the ending period is finished, the small hitting game state Is ended.

In addition, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, after the end of the small hitting game state, the big hitting game state may be continuously generated. Specifically, in the small hitting game state, a game ball is won in the second big winning opening 2005b, and the winning game ball is distributed to the internal V winning opening 2411 (V winning). The number of prescribed rounds that are predetermined according to the type of small hits (in the present embodiment, 10 rounds if the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, 15 if the second special symbol is a big hit symbol) A round game in which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened with the upper limit of (round) is played. Therefore, in the ending effect at the end of the small hitting game state, not only the end of the small hitting game state is shown, but also the game ball enters the V winning opening 2411 inside the second big winning opening 2005b. Whether or not, that is, whether or not the big hit game state is continued from the small hit game state is also shown. In addition, when the big hit game state is continuously generated after the end of the small hit game state, the small hit game state in which the second special winning opening 2005b is opened is one round, and a number including this one round Until the number of round games reaches the specified number of rounds (from the second round to the fifteenth round), the first big winning opening 2005 is played.

Further, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, except for a part of the case where the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, after the big hit game state is finished, it is controlled to a time saving state. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game ball is the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game state executed based on the case where the second special symbol is the big hit symbol and the second special symbol is the small hit symbol. If the game is distributed to, the big hit game state is surely controlled after the end of the game state. In this time saving state, compared with a non-time saving state in which the time saving state does not occur (normal game state or the like), the result of the ordinary determination as to whether or not it is easy to put the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 is derived. Usually the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation is shortened. In addition, in the time saving state, when the winning figure is won in the normal determination, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves forward and backward (forward and backward operations) in a forward/backward pattern different from the non-time saving state. Is becoming

In the present embodiment, in the case of winning the universal figure in the non-time saving state, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves forward/backward in a short forward/backward manner (0.2 seconds in this example). On the other hand, in the case where A is performed, in the case of winning the universal figure in the time saving state, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves forward/backward in a long forward/backward manner (6 seconds in this example). Is done. In other words, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 is longer in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state, and the total protruding time corresponding to one ordinary drawing is long, and the player operates advantageously. Is set. Therefore, in the time saving state, compared with the case of the non-time saving state, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 is in a state in which the ball entry rate is improved so that the second starting opening door 2022 is more likely to move to the projecting state, and the right hit is continuously performed. When the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004 when it is, the normal symbol variation according to the normal determination is easily performed. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, at least one game ball is accepted in the second starting opening 2004 if the player continues to hit the right ball when he/she wins the game in the time saving state. Even if the player hits right in the drawing and continues to right-handed, the game ball is rarely accepted in the second starting opening 2004.

Further, the time saving state according to this embodiment is to be finished when the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, once) after the end of the big hit game state. .. Similarly, it is a small hit symbol (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C) on the second special symbol side, and when the game ball enters the V prize hole 2411 inside the second big prize hole 2005b. , When the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, once) after the jackpot gaming state has ended, it ends.

The specifications of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment are as follows. Eight kinds of numbers, [1] to [8], are adopted as the decorative design, and [222], [333], [444], [555], [666], [777], [888], and a small hit as the big hit design. [111] is adopted as the design. Further, the winning probability of the big hit on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side is defined as 1/300. The winning probability of the small hit on the first special symbol side is 0/300, and the winning probability of the small hit on the second special symbol side is 299/300, respectively. The winning probability per ordinary figure is defined as 1/20. Also, as the number of game balls, three are for the first left starting opening 2002a, the first right starting opening 2002b, and the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning. Fifteen are defined for each mouth 2005b. Further, as the advancing/retreating pattern A in which the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves forward/backward in a short advancing/retreating manner, the second starting opening door 2022 operates once in the projecting state and operates in the projecting state. It is defined that the protruding state is maintained until 20 ms elapses from. Further, as the advancing/retreating pattern B in which the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves forward/backward in a long advancing/retreating manner, the second starting opening door 2022 operates once in the protruding state and operates in the protruding state. The state in which the protruding state is maintained until 6s has elapsed is defined. Further, "1 ball" is defined as the upper limit number of winnings, which is a condition for retreating the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004. In addition, in each round game in the big hit game state, "1 time" is set as the number of times the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, and "9 balls" is set as the maximum winning number. Further, in the small hitting game state, "1 time" is defined as the number of times the second big winning opening 2005b is opened, and "9 balls" is defined as the maximum winning number.

As described above, in the non-time saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs, and the game ball is accepted to the first starting port (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b). The variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on. The game executed in this non-time saving state is a normal game, and is hereinafter referred to as a normal mode.

In the normal mode (non-time saving state), when the game ball is accepted into the first starting opening (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b), the main control board 1310 makes a hit determination, and a big hit is made in the hit determination. If you have won the jackpot, after determining the jackpot type related to whether or not to control to the time saving state after the jackpot game state, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the pattern mode according to the result of the hit determination (big hit symbol, loss) Stop the first special symbol with (pattern). At this time, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, a big hit game state is performed.

If the big hit type is not to be controlled after the big hit game state, the normal mode (non-time saving state) is continued again after the big hit game state. On the other hand, when the type of big hit is to control to the time saving state after the big hit game state, it is controlled to the time saving state after the big hit game state.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, a special symbol based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first left starting opening 2002a (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b) and the second starting opening 2004 (the first One special symbol, the second special symbol) from the start of the variable display until these symbols are stopped, the first left starting port 2002a (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) and When the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) cannot be started, and thus the special symbol started earlier (first special symbol, Until the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the start of variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended. The number of reserved memories of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) to be reserved is the first left starting opening 2002a (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b) and the second. With respect to the starting ports 2004, the upper limit is four, respectively, and for more than that, the first left starting port 2002a (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) and the second starting port 2004 are game balls. Even if it is accepted, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not suspended, and is abandoned. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to perform variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the function display unit 1400 is a combination of a plurality of LEDs, which are repeatedly turned on and off and blinked for a predetermined time, and then turned on. By suggesting the result of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (the symbol mode according to the result of the hit determination).

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the result of the hit determination as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the result of the hit determination in the effect display device 1600 is a state in which three or more symbol rows each including a symbol are displayed side by side, and each symbol row is changed, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The columns are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the symbols in the three symbol columns that are stopped and displayed are stopped and displayed so that the symbols corresponding to the hit determination results are combined. If the result of the hit determination is other than “miss”, after three symbols are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image indicating the result of the hit determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game state or a small hit game state) occurs according to the result of the hit determination.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the result of the hit determination by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 of the effect operation unit 400 is selected according to the result of the lottery hit determination. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various ornaments of center accessory 2500, various ornaments of back unit, back lower rear movable effect unit, back upper left movable effect unit, back left movable effect unit, back upper It is possible to perform light emission production, movable production, display production, etc. by appropriately using the middle movable production unit, the back lower front movable production unit, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various productions. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, even when there is a first reserved memory number that is the number of hit judgment memories on the side of the first special symbol that is held in an unexecuted state, If there is a second reserved memory number that is the number of hit judgment memory on the side of the second special symbol that is being held, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. It has become. And, during the big hit game state, because it is not controlled to the time saving state (is controlled to the non-time saving state), it is a result of the determination (normal determination) whether or not it is a universal figure hit based on the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. As a universal symbol, the symbol is stopped and displayed, and even if the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves back and forth, the forward/backward mode is a short forward/backward mode in which the game ball is hardly received in the second starting port 2004. The winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 hardly occurs. As a result, in the normal mode (non-time saving state), the first special symbol is variably displayed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, in most cases, after the big hit game state, first the first special symbol. Will be variably displayed.

Also, in this example, as the variation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the variation is displayed with a long variation time (120 seconds in this example) longer than the normal variation time regardless of the result of the hit determination. .. In addition, in the time saving state, the state in which the first special symbol is variably displayed in the long variable time is the state in which the right to become a big hit for the second special symbol (winning right) can be acquired, so this state will be described below as a chance mode. Say. Then, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variably displayed in a long variability time, a game aiming at passage of a game ball to the gate portion 2003 is performed.

As described above, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is determined whether or not it is a normal figure (normal determination), and the normal symbol is variably displayed based on the determination result. And, when the stop mode of the normal symbol is the universal symbol, the second starting opening door 2022 is controlled to be in a protruding state and the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004, and the second starting opening When the game ball is received in 2004, the second reserved memory number, which is the number of hit determination memories on the second special symbol side, increases.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, one of the big hit and the small hit is always obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if a small hit as a result of the hit determination on the side of the second special symbol, even one game ball is accepted in the second special winning opening 2005b during the small hit game state. One of them is always assigned to the V winning opening 2411. Further, in this example, if the right hit is continued during the small hitting game state, at least one ball is controlled to be received in the second big winning opening 2005b. That is, in the case of a small hit as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, it is a big hit in most cases, so it is practically a small hit as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. It can be said that they have acquired the right to be a big hit (winning right). That is, the state in which the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004 and the second reserved memory number is present is a state in which a right to be a big hit (winning right) is acquired.

Then, after the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the first special symbol is stopped in the symbol mode (big hit symbol, lost symbol) according to the result of the hit determination when a long variation time has elapsed. At this time, if the first special symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the big hit game state is performed, and if there is a second reserved memory number after the big hit game state, the winning right exercising time described later is entered, and after the big hit game state If there is not two reserve memory number, if the result of the hit judgment on the side of the first special symbol when starting the big hit game state is to control to the time saving state after the big hit game state, continue the chance mode and the first special symbol If the result of the hit judgment on the first special symbol side when starting the big hit game state when there is no second pending storage number is to control to the time saving state after the big hit game state Exit the chance mode and shift to the normal mode. On the other hand, if the first special symbol is stopped due to a lost symbol when the long variable time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special symbol was started, if there is a second reserved memory number, it is shifted to the winning exercise time, If there is no second reserved memory number, the chance mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

In this way, the winning right exercising time is transferred when there is the second reserved memory number, and the game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed is performed. As mentioned above, in addition to the fact that one of the big hits and the small hits is always obtained as the result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, the result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side is small. In the case of a win, it is a state in which the right to be a big hit (winning right) is acquired. Therefore, at the winning right exercising time, the jackpot gaming state is executed by the number of second reserved memories.

Specifically, when the time for exercising the winning right is reached, first, the second special symbol is variably displayed. Then, if the symbol aspect at the time of stopping the second special symbol is the big hit symbol, the big winning game state in which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened according to the determined big hit type is executed, and the second special symbol is stopped. If the symbol mode at the time is a small hit symbol, the small hit game state is executed to make the second big winning opening 2005b in a state in which the game ball can be received, and the game ball winning the second big winning hole 2005b is a V winning. The big hit game state in which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened is executed on the condition that it is distributed to the mouth 2411.

In this example, by continuing right-handing during the small hitting game state, at least one ball is controlled to be received in the second big winning opening 2005b so that the possibility of receiving the game ball is low. When the small hit game state is ended without the ball being distributed to the V winning opening 2411, or the big hit game state executed based on the fact that the symbol aspect when the second special symbol is stopped becomes the big hit symbol is finished. In the case, when the big hit game state executed based on the game balls being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game state is finished, the winning right is provided on the condition that there is the second reserved memory number. Continue exercise time.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the second special symbol is a big hit symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit symbol executed based on the small hit symbol. When it is distributed to the mouth 2411, it is controlled to be in a time saving state after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the small hitting game state is ended without being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hitting game state, or when the symbol aspect at the time of stopping the second special symbol becomes the big hitting symbol. When the executed big hit game state ends, and when the big hit game state executed based on the game balls being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game state also ends, the second reserved memory number If there is not, the time saving state occurs again and the mode is shifted to the chance mode.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example starts the game in the normal mode, wins the big hit in the normal mode, and has a time saving state after the big hit game state, which is a more advantageous state than the normal mode. If the regular judgment is won in the chance mode, it becomes an advantageous state for the player who loops between the winning right time and the chance mode. If the normal judgment is not won in the chance mode, the chance mode is changed to the normal mode. To fall into a disadvantageous state for the player.

[9. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 131A is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 131(a), the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment first has various registers and main control built-in as a process of step S1 provided that the operation switch 954 is operated. Initializes the data stored in RAM. The operation switch 954 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the operation switch 954 outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in accordance with an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU 1310a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined that the data is stored, the initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in the various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the main control built-in RAM. If the operation switch 954 is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control internal RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). A recovery process for recovering the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the restoration process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state. Further, when the initialization process is executed, the game state is controlled to the non-time saving state.

Next, as the processing of step S2, the random number, which is the number to be updated within the predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol The variation random number used in the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of No., the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 in response to the variable display of the special symbol Reach random number used for lottery process of whether or not, the symbol random number used for lottery process to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number (first symbol random number, first Random number (two random numbers), a random number (ordinary random number) used in the lottery process for winning or losing when the operation of the second starting door 2022 is triggered, and the like.

In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, when the start winning is applied to the first starting opening (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b). Also, even when the winning prize is entered into the second starting opening 2004, the reach random number is configured to be obtained from the same counter that updates the reach random number. May be different from each other in the execution ratio of the reach effect by acquiring from the different counter, the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as the reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number, the second It is also possible to make the execution ratio of the reach effect different by providing a second reach determination table in which a determination value different from the first reach determination table is set in correspondence with the special symbol.

In the processing of this step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (fluctuating random number) among these random numbers that is not related to winning or losing is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this manner, basically only the process of step S2 is repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 mS.

FIG. 131B is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 131(b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 4003, the first left starting port sensor 4002a, the first right starting port sensor 4002b, the second starting port sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count. Detection signals from various sensors such as the sensor 4005b and the above general winning opening sensor 4020 are input. Then, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random number related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol is stopped (special random number, ordinary random number) is updated, and the counter of the random number counter is updated. The operation is performed.

Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. To execute. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the second special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress status of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM, is shown. Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Then, next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning or losing the operation trigger of the second starting opening door 2022. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then performs the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. Then, a process for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting the command set in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like in the normal symbol process process is performed.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer as the process of step S18.

Then, next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S19, the first left starting opening sensor 4002a, the first right starting opening sensor 4002b, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the first When the detection signals of the count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the general winning opening sensor 4020, etc. are in the ON state, the payout control board 951 is controlled to payout so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. Executes prize ball processing that outputs a command. As a result, the payout control MPU 952a mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and pays out a prize ball to the player. In this example, when the game ball wins the first left starting opening 2002a and the first left starting opening sensor 4002a is turned on, and when the game ball wins the first right starting opening 2002b, the first When the right starting opening sensor 4002b is turned on, "3 balls", when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening sensor 4004 is turned on, "1 ball", the above When a game ball wins the first prize hole 2005 and the first count sensor 4005a is turned on, "14 balls", the game ball wins the second prize hole 2005b and the second count sensor 4005b is turned on. When it becomes "14 balls", the game balls win the general winning opening 2001, and when the general winning hole sensor 4020 is turned on, "10 balls" of winning balls are paid out to the player.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next executes a storage process for checking the increase/decrease in the number of pending storages as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the content of the register is restored (step S23), and the control is ended when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). Becomes

By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process process (step S14).

Now, assuming that the random numbers provided for the various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 132, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first sets the first starting mouth sensor (first The detection signals from the one left start port sensor 4002a and the first right start port sensor 4002b) are in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first start port (first left start port 2002a, first right start port 2002b)). Under the condition (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Is executed (step S32). Moreover, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number. A second starting opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that it is controlling to the big hit game state is set (step S35), and if the big hit execution flag is set, big hit game state. The big hit control process (step S40) for performing the above control is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the contents of the jackpot type) about the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "10R jackpot". , After opening the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine gaming balls have entered the first special winning opening 2005. The process of controlling the opening and closing pattern to be repeated 10 times is executed to control the 10R big hit game state, and the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit judgment and the contents of the big hit type) about the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is " When it becomes a mode that suggests "15R jackpot", after opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or winning 9 game balls at the first big winning opening 2005 When the first count sensor 4005a detects the open/close pattern, the open/close pattern is repeated 15 times to execute a process of controlling the 15R big hit game state.

In the big hit control process, after the opening control of the first special winning opening 2005 as described above, the time saving flag setting process is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control (control executed in the time saving state) is being executed, and is set when the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot that is time saving controlled after the jackpot gaming state is finished, and will be described later. It is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 143 or the second special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 146 described later. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is set to 1 as the number of time saving, the time saving control is started after the end of the big hit game state, and the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed once. When this is done, the time saving control is terminated.

If the big hit execution flag is not set, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being controlled is set (step S36). If the hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "small win", the second special winning opening 2005b is set for a predetermined period ( After opening (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 4005b that one game ball has been won in the second special winning opening 2005b, the processing is closed. Also, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening 2005b enters the V winning opening 2411, the big winning game state is controlled to open the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, when the first count sensor 4005a detects that 9 game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern to be closed is repeated 14 times to control the shift to the 15R big hit gaming state.

Further, the main control MPU1310a, if neither the big hit running flag or the small hit running flag is set, the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area. On condition that the value of is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the two special symbol reserved storage area is not "0" (step S37), when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped The second special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S32).

Now, in the processing of step S31, the first left starting opening sensor 4002a is in the ON state, and a game ball has entered the first left starting opening 2002a, or the first right starting opening sensor 4002b. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the first right starting opening 2002b, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 133, is in step S41. As the process, first, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first number of reserved storages is "4" which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S42). In the processing of this step S42, if it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is not the maximum value, the following step S43-, in order to newly hold the variable display control of the first special symbol. The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. Then, the process ends.

Further, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S41. Whether or not to be a big hit, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the type type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the production pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before starting the variation display according to the start winning (step S45), the process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S43 to S45, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the first reserve memory number changes based on the game ball entering the first starting opening (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b), the first in the storage processing (step S20). A command for instructing the number of one reserved memory (first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or is executed The mode type of the game effect to be specified is specified (step S61).

Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, whether the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Depending on the type of the game effect to be executed), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories (the value of the reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the predetermination command. For example, in the production pre-determination process for the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passing process, the specified pre-determination information, the first special random number is acquired, and the first reserved storage number (second The value of the one special hold number counter), and the first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding thereto is set (step S62).

Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the main control board 1310 sends a pre-determination command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the start winning opening (first left starting opening 2002a, first) Either one of the right starting opening 2002b), in addition to the number of pending storages stored corresponding to the starting opening, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated starting winning is a big hit, and a big hit. If it becomes a big hit type, if not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or pre-determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is given to the start winning. The peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped before the corresponding variable display is started.

When the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary judgment command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing advance determination information regarding variable display of the first special symbol.

The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command in the first (first) storage. Store in order from the area. Then, when the preliminary judgment command is received when the preliminary judgment information is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, the preliminary judgment information notified to the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, in advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command. Discard the determination information and move the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4) storage area (in the reserved storage area). Shift stored pre-determination information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurs can be specified and is sequentially discarded from the earliest pre-determination information.

In this way, at the time when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained. ), this can be preceded, for example, at a predetermined timing such as a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold exhaustion. ..

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S34).

Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 4004 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004, as shown in FIG. 135. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second reserved memory number is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" (step S52). In the processing of this step S52, when it is determined that the second number of reserved storages is not the maximum value, the following step S53-in order to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol in the suspended state. The process of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special pending number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. Then, the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the number of second reserved storage is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004, a command for instructing the second hold storage number in the storage process (step S20) (second hold number designation) Commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program module, and a random number used for determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag. As a result of comparison with the first special random number in the hit determination process (step S105) described later, there is no case where it is determined to be a small hit, so the hit determination process executed in the first special symbol process process, The hit determination process executed in the two special symbol process processes may be regarded as a separate process, and in each process process in the first special symbol process process, the process related to the small hit may be controlled not to be executed.

1. The first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and the lottery process and the like for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number. Normal processing (step S80)
2. Based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the determination process of the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. is performed. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) )
3. Regarding the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the first special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which lottery process and the like is performed (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S83)
5. As the variation control stop mode of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

The first special symbol process flag is operated in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131) to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 137, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value by the first special suspended number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation random number) is the same main control built-in RAM Read from. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, while counting down the first special reserved number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbols is stopped are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol holding storage area a to first special symbol holding storage area d), the first starting opening (first left starting opening) The random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of the start winning in 2002a and the first right starting opening 2002b) are sequentially stored from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become. Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), depending on the occurrence of a start winning prize for the second starting opening 2004. The random numbers thus extracted are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs can be stored in a manner that can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

Then, after that, as a process of step S105, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the winning of the big hit or the small hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 has a hit determination table and a special random number shown in FIG. 139(A) (first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or second special symbol normal process). It is compared with the read second special random number) (step S114).

As shown in FIG. 139(A), the hit determination table is stored in the ROM with built-in main control and provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, one type of first special random number coincides with the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been hit, and 299 types of the first special random numbers are The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating the loss (big hit probability; 1/300). Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, one kind of second special random number is The above-mentioned second special random number so that the second special random number of 299 kinds which is different from the big hit judgment value and coincides with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won matches the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit is won. Are associated with each other (big hit probability; 1/300, small hit probability; 299/300). That is, the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number is not determined to be a small hit, but is determined to be one of the big hit and the loss. In the hit determination table referred to for comparison, it is always determined that one of the big hit and the small hit.

The main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process) As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit is set (step S116), and the hit judging process is ended.

The result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is a small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is ended.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and a reach determination table at the time saving state used when the gaming state is at the time saving state, and a non-time saving used when the gaming state is at the non-time saving state And a reach determination table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach determination values are matched so that one type of reach random number reaches the reach determination value, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that the reach does not reach. Random numbers are associated with each.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, 5 types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state coincide with the reach determination value indicating reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the reach random numbers are not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), and determines that reach loss occurs (step S120), the variation is changed. A reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S121).

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 140, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU 1310a selects the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 139(B), and the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. By comparing with the selected big hit symbol determination table, the big hit symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined (step S132).

As shown in FIG. 139(B), the jackpot symbol determination table is associated with each symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) according to the determination result (10R jackpot A, 10R jackpot B, 15R jackpot). It is memorized in the form of. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the jackpot symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. doing.

In particular,
1. After opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 10 times, the game ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy) to control the 10R big hit game state, and after the big hit game state is finished, the 10R big hit A is controlled.
2. After opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 10 times, the game ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy) and is controlled to the 10R big hit game state, and after the big hit game state is finished, the 10R big hit B is controlled.
3. After opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, it is closed. 15R big hit to control the game ball to 15R big hit game state where the game ball can enter (easy) the first big winning hole 2005 by repeating the opening and closing pattern 15 times, and to control to the time saving state after the big hit game state ends

In the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 80 judgment values are distributed when the 10R jackpot A is obtained, and 20 judgment values are distributed when the 10R jackpot B is obtained. That is, when a lottery result is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is an 80% probability of being a 10R jackpot A and a 20% probability of being a 10R jackpot B. On the other hand, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, all 100 judgment values are distributed when the 15R jackpot is obtained, and a lottery result to be a jackpot is obtained by lottery based on the second special random number. There will always be a 15R big hit.

Further, when a lottery result for a big hit is obtained, the game state after the big hit game state is finished is determined according to the type of the big hit. Then, in the big hit control process (step S40), after the big hit game state is controlled, a time saving flag setting process is executed based on the determination result.

Specifically, when it is determined that the "10R big hit A" big hit has been obtained, after the big hit game state for 10 rounds is executed, the symbol shortening of the special symbol is executed once until the symbol fluctuation is executed once. When it is determined that the “10R jackpot B” jackpot is obtained, the jackpot game state for 10 rounds is executed, then the non-time saving state is controlled, and the “15R jackpot” jackpot is obtained. When it is determined that it has been done, after the jackpot gaming state for 15 rounds is executed, it is controlled to the time saving state until the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed once.

In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, if 10R big hit A is decided, it is decided as 10R big hit A symbol as a big hit symbol, and if 10R big hit B is decided, it is decided as 10R big hit B symbol as a big hit symbol. .. Moreover, when it is determined to be the 15R big hit in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 144 described later, it is determined to be the 15R big hit symbol as the big hit symbol.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines a lost symbol when the big hit flag is not set (step S136).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S137, selects the lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, reach lose, or lose). The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, after that, as the process of step S138, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed and the left decorative pattern → the right decorative pattern → the middle decorative pattern). Stop display in the order of the symbols (It is possible that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with each other in a synchronized manner). Specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is a variation mode (stop pattern) when 10R big hit A among the big hits is specified from the received determination result notification command. Is determined to be a 10R jackpot A pattern (a combination of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns being the same symbols except [1] among the symbols [1] to [8]), and when the 10R jackpot B is specified Is determined to be a 10R jackpot B symbol (a combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols being the same symbol except [1] among the symbols of [0] to [8]), and when the 15R jackpot is specified 15R jackpot design (a combination of the left, middle, and right decorative designs being the same design except [1] among the designs [0] to [8]) is determined. In addition, when the small hit is specified, the small hit design (the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative designs is all [1]; [111]) is decided, and when the reach loss is specified, the reach is accompanied. Loss design (a combination of the same design of left and right decorative designs [0] to [8], but a different middle decorative design; reach reach design) is determined, and if the loss is specified, Lost design without reach (a combination of left, middle, and right decorative designs in which at least the left and right decorative designs are different) is determined, and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command elapses (game production At the end of), the determined stop design is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag as shown in FIG. 141. If it is done (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit decided at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), a variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S146), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal loss (reach effect). In the case of "missing not performing", a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of losing is selected (step S147).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the variation pattern table is started around. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S150). Thereby, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 1403 only for the variation time thus determined, and the production control is performed on the production display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU1310a, the variation pattern table selected from among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, By comparing, and by acquiring the variation time information associated with the read variation random number from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM with built-in main control.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of the reach of this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of the reach production to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach production is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, out of 241 types of variable random numbers, 164 types of variable random numbers are set as the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers have a low jackpot expectation. It is set as a determination value (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the effects is executed, and 18 types of variable random numbers are determination values (223 to 240) indicating that any of the super reach effects with a high jackpot expectation degree is executed. ) Is set as. It should be noted that the super-reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and for a player who desires the occurrence of the big-hit game state, the expectation of the player for the big-hit game state when the super-reach effect is executed is higher. It is increasing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 139(D), in the variation pattern table of this example, 10 seconds to 90 seconds are set as the variation time corresponding to the first special random number in the non-time saving state, and 120 seconds are set in the time saving state. , 2 seconds is commonly set for the non-time saving state and the time saving state as the variation time corresponding to the second special random number.

Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process is ended.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S171. As the process, the change timer for which the change time is set according to the change pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the change pattern is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, this process is finished at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S181 As the process, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, and the first special symbol on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Next, when the time saving flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving flag (step S185). Thereby, when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed once, the time saving control is ended and the control in the non-time saving state is started.

When the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game state is started (step S187), and the jackpot game is played. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying that the big hit game state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big hit to a big hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The big hit count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit count counter reaches "0", it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified round count. And control to end the jackpot gaming state. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, until the big hit number counter reaches "0", the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S91) and the special winning opening opening processing (step S92) are repeatedly executed to make a big winning. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S92), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 and becomes "0". Then, the process shifts to the big winning mouth opening post-process (step S93) to set the jackpot gaming state. Execute control to end.

Then, the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (10R jackpot A start command, 10R jackpot B start command, 15R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (10R jackpot A start command, 10R jackpot A start command) is set. Thereby, the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like perform the effect of the big hit game state according to the kind of big hit instructed by the big hit start command.

In addition, the big hit execution flag which shows that the big hit game state is being executed, when the big hit game state is ended, specifically, after the big winning opening opening process (step S93) of the big hit control process (step S40). Opening/closing control of the first special winning opening 2005 according to the type of big hit (for example, in the case of "15R big hit", after opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the first big winning opening 2005) At the end of the (open/close control that repeats the open/close pattern that is closed 15 times when the first count sensor 4005a detects that 9 game balls have been won), (all the rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game state) Will be reset. While the big hit execution flag is reset, the big hit control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403. The variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 can be executed.

If the big hit flag is not set, that is, if there is a loss, the process proceeds to step S194 without executing the processes of steps S187 to S189.

When the processes of steps S186 to S189 are executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. Then (step S194), this processing ends.

FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

As described above, the second special symbol process process is a program module that is substantially the same as the first special symbol process process, and except for some processes, the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, so in the following, Only the processing different from the processing executed in the first special symbol process processing will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, while not including a small hit as a result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, the variable display stop of the second special symbol is not included. Since it also includes a small win as a result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, as a result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, with a small win It is also determined whether or not it has become. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether or not the small hit flag is set.

Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set (step S131a), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S133a), and if the small hit flag is set, the state shown in FIG. By selecting the small hit symbol determination table shown in C), the second special symbol fluctuation control by comparing the second random symbol read in the second special symbol normal process (not shown) with the selected small hit symbol determination table The small hit symbol as the mode at the time of stop (stop symbol of the second special symbol) is determined (step S134a).

As shown in FIG. 139(D), the small hit symbol determination table is associated with respective random symbols (second random symbol) according to the determination result (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C). Remembered The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of small hit by identifying the determination result associated with the acquired second symbol random number.

In particular,
1. After opening the second special winning opening 2005b for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 4005b that nine gaming balls have been won in the second special winning opening 2005b When the gaming ball that is controlled to the small hitting game state and is received in the second big winning hole 2005b during the small hitting game state is distributed to the V winning hole 2411, the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, (28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, the game ball is closed by repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times. A small hit A that controls a big hit game state that allows (easy) entry into one big winning hole 2005, and controls to a time saving state after the big hit game state ends
2. After opening the second special winning opening 2005b for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 4005b that nine gaming balls have been won in the second special winning opening 2005b When the gaming ball that is controlled to the small hitting game state and is received in the second big winning hole 2005b during the small hitting game state is distributed to the V winning hole 2411, the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won in the first special winning opening 2005, the game ball is closed by repeating the opening/closing pattern nine times. Small hit B to control the big hit game state that can enter the one big winning hole 2005 (easy), and to control to the time saving state after the big hit game state ends
3. After opening the second special winning opening 2005b for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 4005b that nine gaming balls have been won in the second special winning opening 2005b When the gaming ball that is controlled to the small hitting game state and is received in the second big winning hole 2005b during the small hitting game state is distributed to the V winning hole 2411, the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, (28.5 seconds) or after the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, the game ball is closed by repeating the opening and closing pattern four times. A small hit C that controls the big hitting game state that allows (easy) entry into one big winning hole 2005, and controls the time saving state after the big hitting game state ends

In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 10 judgment values are distributed when the small hit A is obtained, and 20 determination values are distributed when the small hit B is obtained. When the hit is C, 70 judgment values are distributed. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 10% chance of a small win A, a 20% chance of a small win B, and a 70% probability of a small win. It becomes B.

When a lottery result for a small hit is obtained, the game balls accepted by the second special winning opening 2005b are distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hitting game state according to the type of the small hit. The gaming state after the jackpot gaming state that occurs is determined. In the big hit control process (step S40), the big hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the game ball received in the second big winning hole 2005b during the small hit game state is distributed to the V winning hole 2411. After that, the process of setting the time saving flag is executed based on the determination result.

Specifically, when it is determined that the small hit of "small hit A" is obtained, after the big hit game state for 15 rounds is executed, the time saving until the symbol change of the special symbol is executed once Controlled to the state, when it is determined that the small hit of "small hit B" is obtained, after the big hit game state for 10 rounds is executed, it is shortened until the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol is executed once. Controlled to the state, when it is determined that the small hit of "small hit C" was obtained, after the big hit game state for 5 rounds is executed, it is shortened until the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol is executed once. Controlled by the state.

In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, when the small hit A is decided, the small hit A symbol is decided as the small hit symbol, and when the small hit B is decided, the small hit symbol B is decided as the small hit symbol. When the small hit C is decided, the small hit C design is decided as the small hit design.

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second variation pattern setting process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

If the big hit flag is not set in the second variation pattern setting process (step S141a), and the small hit flag is set (step S143a), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects the time of the small hit. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S144a).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in the second special symbol normal process (step S148a), and the peripheral control board 1510 is to start the determined variation pattern. The variation pattern command to be notified to is set and the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display device 1405 is started (step S149a). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S150a). Thereby, the variation display control of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display device 1405 only for the variation time determined in this way, and the production display device 1600 produces control in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol stop process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

When the big hit flag is not set (step S186a), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shows that if the small hit flag is set (step S190a), the small hit game state is started. A small hit start command is set (step S191a), and a waiting time until the start of the small hit game state (a time for displaying that the small hit game state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S192a). Then, a small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being executed is set (step S193a). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of small hit. In step S191a, a small hit start command (small hit A start command, small hit B start command, small hit C start command) corresponding to the type of small hit (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C) is set. .. Thereby, the effect of the small hitting game state according to the type of small hitting designated by the small hitting start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker and the like.

In addition, the small hitting execution flag which indicates that the small hitting game state is being executed, when the small hitting game state is finished, specifically, the small hitting process (step S41) of the small hitting control process described later (step S41). In step S401), the opening/closing control of the second special winning opening 2005b according to the type of small hit (for example, if it is "small hit C", after opening the second special winning opening 2005b for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or It is reset when the opening/closing control for closing when the second count sensor 4005b detects that nine game balls have been won in the second special winning opening 2005b) is completed. While the small hit execution flag is reset, the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display 1403 is first. The variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 can be executed.

If the small hit flag is not set, that is, if there is a loss, the process proceeds to step S194a without executing the processes of steps S190a to S193a.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S40). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. Based on the fact that the special display (first special design, second special design) variable display stop mode becomes a big hit design, the notification to the player such as a transition to the big hit game state is given to the peripheral control board. Preparatory processing for opening the special winning opening that waits until it is performed by 1510 or waits until the next round starts (step S91)
2. The first special winning opening 2005 is controlled to an open state based on the fact that the variation display stop of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, or the first big winning opening 2005 is started based on the start of the next round. Is controlled to be in an open state, and after opening the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine game balls have been won in the first special winning opening 2005, the first count sensor 4005a Processing during opening of special winning opening that is closed when detected (step S92)
3. After all the rounds are finished, the large winning opening opening post-processing is waited for until the peripheral control board 1510 informs the player that the jackpot gaming state is over (step S93).
The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S91) should be performed in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit control process (step S41). In the small hitting process, one of the following two process processes will be selectively executed according to the small hitting process flag.

1. Small hitting start processing which executes the setting processing for starting the small hitting game state (step S400)
2. Small hit processing during small hit (step S401) which monitors the entering and opening time of the game ball in the game state

The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit start process (step S400).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer indicating the standby time until the start of the small hitting game state as the process of step S411, and if this interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S412). ) The processing is terminated without executing the subsequent processing. The interval timer is set based on that the small hit flag is set when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped as described above (second special symbol stop process).

On the other hand, if the interval timer has timed out (YES in step S412), the opening time of the second special winning opening 2005b is set in the opening timer (step S413), and after the small hit opening time effect command is set (step S413). (S415), the second big winning opening 2005b is controlled to the open state (step S416).

After that, when the small hitting process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the small hitting process (step S401) (step S417), this process ends.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting process (step S401).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not the number of game balls received in the second special winning opening 2005b by the second count sensor 4005b reaches "9" as the process of step S421. When it is determined that the number of game balls received in the second special winning opening 2005b has reached “9”, the process proceeds to step S427.

If the number of game balls received in the second special winning opening 2005b in step S421 has not reached "9", the second special winning opening 2005b is controlled to be in an open state and then to be closed. 1 is subtracted from the release timer indicating the release time up to (step S425), it is determined whether the release timer has timed out (step S426), and if it has not timed out (NO in step S426), the subsequent processing If the time is out (YES in step S426), the process proceeds to step S427.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the small hit execution flag (step S427), and controls the open second winning opening 2005b to the closed state (step S428).

At this time, if a game ball has entered the V winning opening 2411 (step S429), a 1R end command indicating that one round of the big hit game state is ended is set (step S430), and until the big hit game state starts. After setting the standby time of the interval timer to the interval timer (step S431), the jackpot execution flag and the accessory winning flag indicating that the jackpot game state has been set based on V winning during the jackpot game state are set. (Step S432). The accessory winning flag is used to determine whether the jackpot game state has been entered or the jackpot pattern has been stopped and the jackpot game state has been entered based on the fact that a V prize has been won during the jackpot game state in the jackpot control process (step S40). , If the accessory winning flag is set, when the 15R jackpot gaming state is executed, it is notified as if the second round of the 15R jackpot gaming state is executed over 15 rounds. The player comes to recognize that the 15R big hit game state including the small hit game state is being executed.

Although not shown, in step S431, the number of unexecuted rounds out of the number of big hits corresponding to the type of small hit (the number of remaining rounds when the small hit game state is set to one round (for example, to the V winning opening 2411) Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the 15R big hit game state, if it is a small hit A, the number of remaining rounds is 14)), and a big hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also set. As described above, the big hit number counter is decremented by 1 each time the round is executed in the big hit control process, and when the big hit number counter becomes "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 causes the specified number of rounds. Is determined to have been executed and the jackpot gaming state is ended.

When the process of step S432 is completed and when it is determined that there is no V winning in step S429, when the small hit process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the small hit start process (step S400) (step (S417), this process ends.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process processing (step S15).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU1310a of the control board 1310, as the process of step S802, first obtains a normal random number of the ordinary symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area of the RAM to execute a gate portion passing process. To do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process or the like for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803)
2. Ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804) in which lottery processing or the like is performed for the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device based on the random symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation processing to wait until the variable display of the above normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display is stopped (step S805)
4. The variation display of the normal symbol so that the mode of the variation control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display aspect of the variation control of the normal symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol display device. Normal symbol stop process to stop (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "universal pattern hit", execute the process for controlling the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004. Normal electric accessory release process (step S807)

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S802).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S811, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the normal reserved number counter indicating the number of ordinary random numbers stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved memories of the normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S811, when it is determined that the number of storages of the above-mentioned normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the above-mentioned normal symbols in the state of suspension Will be processed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, in step S813, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S814, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the processing of the step S811, when it is determined that the number of the reserved storage of the normal symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by not performing the processing of step S812 to step S814 (the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure fluctuation random number are not acquired from the above random number counter), the variable display control of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is not newly put on hold.

Note that the gate passage process (step S802) may be another example described below. For example, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 will first perform the normal operation. The random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value by the above-mentioned normal reserved number counter is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and based on this counter value, it is judged whether or not the reserved memory number of ordinary symbols is "4" which is the maximum value. To do. Then, when it is determined that the number of stored storage of the normal symbol is not the maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display control of the normal symbol into the newly suspended state, the ordinary reserved number counter is incremented (1 is added. ), and then the previously acquired ordinary random number, the universal figure fluctuation random number (the ordinary random number stored in the temporary storage area, the universal figure fluctuation random number) are stored in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a. Stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the above normal reservation number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, when it is determined that this counter value is "4" which is the maximum value (the hold storage number of the normal symbol is In the case of the maximum value), the normal random number previously acquired, the general pattern fluctuation random number is discarded without storing in the normal symbol holding storage area, and the variable display control of the acquired normal symbol is newly added. It may be possible not to be held.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, based on the ordinary random number and the ordinary variable random number acquired in step S813, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol is a universal symbol, and normally executes Pre-determination information such as the type variation of the pattern variation (type of the universal symbol variation pattern) is executed before the ordinary symbol variation determination process for determining before the normal symbol variation according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 is started. After that (step S815), the process ends.

FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the universal figure advance determination process (step S815). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the universal figure advance determination process, it compares the universal figure advance determination table (not shown) with the random number acquired in step S813, specifically, the ordinary random number or the ordinary variable random number. Thus, whether or not it is a universal figure, if it is a universal figure, the type of a regular figure and the type of the mode of the normal symbol variation to be executed are specified (step S881).

Then, the specified public figure pre-determination information (whether or not it becomes a common figure, if it becomes a common figure, type of common figure, type of mode of normal pattern change to be executed, etc.) and reserved storage of normal symbols Set the universal figure pre-determination command according to the number (the value of the ordinary hold number counter).

Then, in the normal symbol command control process (step S17), a general symbol advance determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Whether or not the display result of the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game sphere is to be the ordinary figure, if it is the ordinary figure, the type of the ordinary figure, the type of the mode of the ordinary symbol variation to be executed, etc. Peripheral control MPU1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be able to grasp the figure prior determination information before starting the normal symbol variation according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003.

When the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the general figure advance determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the general figure advance determination information indicated by the received general figure advance determination command. There is. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a general figure reservation storage area for storing general figure preliminary determination information.

In addition, the universal figure reservation storage area has storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a uses the universal figure advance determination information indicated by the received universal figure advance determination command as the first (maximum) The data is stored in order from the first storage area. When the universal figure advance determination information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the universal figure advance determination command is received, the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area is notified. The general figure advance judgment information is stored, and when the general figure variation pattern command for notifying the variation display start of the ordinary symbol is received, it is stored in the first storage area of the universal figure reservation storage area according to the received universal figure variation pattern command. The general figure a priori determination information is discarded and the general figure a priori determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is stored in the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4) storage area. To (to shift the universal figure preliminary determination information stored in the universal figure reservation storage area). As a result, the normal figure prior determination information of the normal symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the normal symbol variation occurs can be specified and is discarded in order from the earliest universal symbol prior determination information.

In this way, when the normal symbol variation is put on hold, the normal symbol variation is maintained in an unexecuted state (holding state), but the ordinary symbol variation expectation degree (pseudo) With regard to the winning probability), it is possible to notify this at a predetermined timing, for example, when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display is shifted according to the completion of the pending display. become. Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives a universal figure advance determination command indicating that the result of the lottery process (ordinary determination) for the ordinary symbols is an ordinary hit during the chance mode, it is an effect that suggests that it is an ordinary hit. If a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute, and as a result of the lottery, it is decided to execute an effect that suggests that a normal hit, the universal figure hold display area 1609 (FIG. 165) corresponding to the universal figure advance determination command The display mode of (see) is changed to a special mode different from the normal mode and displayed. In this example, a circle filled in blue is displayed as a normal display mode of the universal figure reservation display area 1609, and a circle filled in red is displayed as a special mode different from the normal mode. The peripheral control MPU1511a does not actually win normally even when it receives a universal figure advance judgment command indicating that the result of the lottery process (normal judgment) for normal symbols is normal loss during the chance mode. If a lottery is performed to determine whether or not an effect that suggests a win is to be performed, and if the result of the lottery is to decide to execute an effect that suggests a normal hit, The display mode of the figure reservation display area 1609 is changed to a special mode for display. However, when the result of the lottery process (ordinary determination) for the ordinary symbol is a normal loss, the result of the lottery process (ordinary determination) for the ordinary symbol is a normal win when the universal symbol advance determination command indicating that it is a normal loss is received. The proportion determined to execute the effect suggesting that the normal hit is lower than that in the case of receiving the universal figure advance determination command indicating that the special aspect is displayed in the universal figure hold display area 1609. When it is done, it is possible to improve the expectation for the normal hit, and thus the big hit of the second special symbol.

Further, the effect that suggests that the normal hit is not limited to the above-mentioned one, but a special sound (for example, a pico-picone or the like) is output based on the reception of the universal figure advance determination command, or the normal hit. If the effect suggesting that is not performed, the voice may not be output, or a voice (pico-clip etc.) different from the special voice may be output), the door frame 3 or the game board 5 The special lighting pattern for the lamps, LEDs, etc. provided in the (indicates that the lamps, LEDs, etc. are not turned on unless a performance that suggests that they are "normal hits" is not performed, while suggesting that they are "normal hits". If you want to perform the effect, the lamp, LED, etc. should be blinked multiple times in a short time), or a special light emission color (normal effect should be used, the lamp, LED, etc. should be blue. On the other hand, when performing an effect that suggests that the hit is a normal hit, a lamp or LED may be turned on in red) or the like may be used to emit light. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of these may be executed to execute an effect that suggests a normal hit.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 154, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S821, Based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, then, as the process of step S822, normally stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random number, general figure variation random number) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, when the normal hold number counter is counted down, the variable display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. The random numbers (ordinary random numbers and universal figure fluctuation random numbers) related to the display mode in (1) are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially arranged from the first (first) area. Remember. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the random number extracted to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area is stored. The random number stored in the first storage area is read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4) is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). ..

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the universal figure collision determination table shown in FIG. 155(A) with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

The universal figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 155(A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, in the ordinary figure per hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, one type of ordinary random number coincides with the ordinary figure per decision value indicating that the ordinary figure is won, and 19 types of ordinary random numbers are used. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the general-drawing-deviation determination value, which indicates that the drawing is lost.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the ordinary figure hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process, and determines that the ordinary figure hit (step S829), The variation per winning symbol is selected for the universal symbol, and the universal symbol hit flag is set (step S830), and the regular symbol variation control stop mode (normal symbol stop symbol) is determined as the universal symbol per symbol. (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that the normal symbol is not hit, the general symbol lost symbol is determined as the mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped (step S833).

After the lottery process for the ordinary symbols is performed in this way, as a process of step S834, the lottery result (instruction of either normal figure or loss) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the universal figure determination result notification command according to each result. After that, as the process of step S835, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804), this process ends.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 156, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the time saving flag set. If (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time saving shown in FIG. 157 is selected (step S842), and if the time saving flag is set (step S841), normal for non-time saving shown in FIG. 157. The symbol variation pattern determination table is selected (step S843).

Then, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol to be executed (general symbol variation pattern) is determined by comparing the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table with the ordinary symbol variation random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process (step S844). ), the general pattern variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the normal symbol variation in the determined universal symbol variation pattern, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 1402 is started ( Step S845). Peripheral control MPU1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is the normal symbol determination result notification command set in step S834 of the normal symbol normal process and the normal symbol variation pattern command set in step S845 of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process. By receiving the normal variable display of the normal symbol until the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped and the variation control mode of the normal symbol stop mode (normal symbol stop symbol) is specified and directed A variable display of the normal symbol is started on the display device 1600, and a stop symbol of the normal symbol specified by the general pattern determination result notification command is displayed when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol specified by the general pattern change pattern command has elapsed. It is displayed on the device 1600.

Further, when the main control MPU 1310a determines the universal figure variation pattern, the main control MPU 1310a sets the universal figure variation time according to the determined universal figure variation pattern in the universal figure variation timer (step S846). As a result, the production control is performed by the ordinary symbol display device 1402 (variable display of the ordinary symbol) and the above-mentioned effect display device 1600 (variable display of the decorative ordinary symbol) only for the universal symbol variation time according to the determined universal symbol variation pattern. Will be done.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 157, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time saving and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time saving are provided. And, in the non-time saving ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern determination table, the distribution of the judgment value is set to be different as compared with the ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination table in the time saving, so that the regular symbol fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 157, the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table for time saving is determined for the time saving loss variation pattern set to 2 seconds as the universal symbol variation time at the time of loss of the ordinary symbol. Whereas the distribution of values is set, the non-time saving ordinary pattern variation pattern determination table has the non-time saving loss variation pattern 1 set to 4 seconds as the general symbol variation time when the normal symbol is lost. The determination value is assigned to the non-time saving time loss variation pattern 2 set to 5 seconds. That is, the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time saving is set so that the variation time of the normal symbol is extremely short compared to the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time saving. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

Further, when the variable display control of the normal symbol is started, next, as a process of step S847, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation process (step S805), this The process ends.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation process (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 158, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S851, In step S846, the universal figure variation timer for which the universal figure variation time is set is decremented by 1. Then, when the universal figure variation time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S852), the processing of the following steps S853 to S856 will be performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S853, while performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol normal process on the normal symbol display device 1402, the effect display device 1600 normally. A normal figure stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decoration ordinary pattern according to the stop symbol of the symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S854). Further, in step S853, a predetermined universal figure fixing time (0.5 seconds in this example) is set to the regular figure stop timer 1 as a time for maintaining the stop symbol of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. (Step S855). As a result, after stopping the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1402, the normal symbol display device 1402 is controlled to display the stop symbol of the normal symbol for a predetermined public symbol determination time. Then, next, in the process of step S856, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol stop process (step S806), this process ends.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol stop processing (step S806). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 159, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S861, In step S855 of the above-mentioned normal symbol variation processing, the universal figure stop timer in which a predetermined universal figure fixed time is set is decremented by 1. Then, the universal figure stop timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the predetermined regular figure fixed time has elapsed (step S862), the display control of the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 1402. With the end of the process, a universal figure finalization command for instructing finalization of the display result of the decorative ordinary symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. Yes (step S863).

Then, next, when the universal figure hitting flag is set (step S864), a second starting opening corresponding to the current game state is used by using the universal figure hitting time open pattern table shown in FIG. 155(B). The advancing/retreating pattern of the door 2022 is set (step S865).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 155(B), if the second starting opening door 2022 is controlled to a non-time saving state at the start of opening, the advance/retreat pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the second starting opening door 2022. To do. That is, if the second starting opening door 2022 is controlled to be in a non-time saving state at the start of the forward/backward movement, the second starting opening door 2022 will be short when the drawing result that is a universal figure is obtained by the drawing based on the ordinary random number. The advancing/retreating pattern A that moves forward/backward in the advancing/retreating mode (0.2 seconds in this example) is executed.

On the other hand, if the current game state is controlled to the time saving state at the start of the forward/backward movement of the second starting opening door 2022, the forward/backward pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second starting opening door 2022. That is, if the second starting opening door 2022 is controlled in a time saving state at the time of starting the advancing/retreating operation, the second starting opening door 2022 will move forward/backward when the lottery result based on the ordinary random number is obtained. The advancing/retreating pattern B for advancing/retreating in the mode (6 seconds in this example) is executed.

When the advancing/retreating pattern of the second starting door 2022 is set, next, as the processing of step S886, a universal figure start command indicating that the universal figure per game is started is set, and an ordinary symbol process flag is an ordinary electric role. When the process is updated so that the process is transferred to the object release process (step S867), this process ends. Note that the universal figure start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the universal figure game according to the type of universal figure instructed by the universal figure start command is the effect display device 1600. It is executed by a lamp/LED and a speaker.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the normal symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process, which is the initial value, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol hit flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal electric auditors product opening process (step S807).

Now, in the processing of step S871, if it is determined that the second starting opening door 2022 is in the protruding state and the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the substrate 1310, when a predetermined time (opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the advance/retreat pattern set in step S865) has elapsed after starting the opening state of the second starting port 2004 (step S872), When the second starting opening door 2022 is retracted and the second starting opening 2004 in the open state is controlled to be in the closed state (step S873), this process ends.

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second starting opening door 2022 is in the retracted state and the second starting opening 2004 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310 advances the second starting port door 2022 and closes the second starting port door 2022 when it is time to open the second starting port door 2022 (step S874). When is controlled to the open state (step S875), this process ends.

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that it is not the timing to open the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is When the number of times of opening the starting port 2004 reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times of opening/closing operation of the second starting port door 2022 in the advancing/retreating pattern set in step S865) (step S876), a universal figure end command is set (step S877). ). Then, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S878), this process ends. It should be noted that the universal figure hit end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral figure control board 1510 receives the universal figure end command, the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like perform the effect of the universal figure hit game being executed. To finish.

[10. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, a process executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 161, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs initial setting processing (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an interrupt every 2 mS, and executes a 2 mS steady process. In the 2 mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 mS has elapsed, 16 mS has elapsed. While setting the flag T, the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). As described above, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

In the 16 mS steady process, a process for controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is "0"), the loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing an example of the 16 mS steady process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the production control process of step S602, the production is performed based on the fact that the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process) is received. A control process related to the display device 1600 is executed.

Further, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing relating to the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control processing of step S604, control processing relating to the lamp/LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp/LED lighting signal to the lamp drive substrate 4170 is executed. In the random number updating process of step S606, a process of updating the random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS steady processing ends within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process to the end of the 16 mS steady-state process, the 16 mS steady-state process is immediately started from the beginning when 16 mS has elapsed from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process (command of step S601. Do not execute (from parsing process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapse flag is set after the 16 mS steady process is completed, the 16 mS steady process is executed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. Not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop process and the 16 mS steady process in the sub-main process.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S602).

In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be done.

1. A variation pattern command (first variation pattern command that indicates a variation pattern of the first special symbol, a second variation pattern) that indicates a variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed by the command analysis process. After performing the process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like based on the second change pattern command for instructing the change pattern of the special symbol, the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the change effect intermediate process. Change effect start process of changing to (step S711)
2. Measure the elapsed time from the start of control of the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc., perform the process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. according to the elapsed time, and perform the special symbol ( (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) The fluctuation production inside processing which changes the production process flag to the value which responds to fluctuation end processing according to the fluctuation time which responds to fluctuation pattern of (2nd special design) (step S712)
3. Performs a process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of a stop display command instructing the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and if it is lost, the above effect Variable production end processing that changes the process flag to a value according to the variation production start processing, if it is a big hit, to a value according to the big hit production processing, and if it is a small hit, to a value according to the small hit production processing (Step S713)
4. Processing for executing display control during the big hit game state is performed on the effect display device 1600 on the basis of receiving the big hit start command for instructing the start of the big hit game state, and when the big hit game state is finished, the above-mentioned effect process Big hit production process that changes the flag to a value according to the variation production start process (step S714)
5. Based on the reception of the small hit start command for instructing the start of the small hit game state, the effect display device 1600 performs a process for executing the display control during the small hit game state, and the second during the small hit game state. If the game ball received in the big winning opening 2005b is distributed to the V winning opening 2411, the effect process flag is changed to a value according to the big hit effect starting process when the small hit game state is finished, and the game ball is If it is not distributed to the V winning opening 2411, a small hit production process of changing to a value according to the variation production start process (step S715)

Special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 1403, second special symbol display device 1405) by the above-mentioned processing is performed in synchronization with the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed on the display device 1600.

[11. About games in chance mode and exercise time of winning rights]
In this embodiment, the game is started in the normal mode, the big hit is won in the normal mode, and the time saving state occurs after the big hit game state, so that the chance mode, which is a more advantageous state than the normal mode, shifts to the chance mode. The game proceeds to the winning right exercising time due to the occurrence of the second reserved memory, but the game in such a chance mode and the winning right exercising time will be described with reference to FIG.

First, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the normal mode (non-time saving state) and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the first big winning opening 2005 is given as each round game in the big hit gaming state. In the open state (withdrawal state), in order to enter a large amount of game balls into the first winning opening 2005 which has been opened, the game balls have to be driven one after another on the right side of the center accessory 2500. As described above, when the game ball is driven into the right side of the center role object 2500, about 2/100 of the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 are always moved forward and backward. The game ball enters the inside of the constantly driving door 2021 and the winning of the game ball to the first right starting opening 2002b occurs. Therefore, during the big hit game state, one or more gaming balls with a high probability win the first right starting opening 2002b, and are held as the first reserved memory number, which is the memory number for the hit determination on the first special symbol side. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, during the big hit game state, it is not controlled to the time saving state (is controlled to the non-time saving state), so it is temporarily determined whether or not it is a universal figure hit based on the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 (normal determination). As a result, the universal symbol is stopped and displayed, and even if the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves forward and backward, the forward and backward movement mode is short forward and backward with almost no acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004. As a result, the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 hardly occurs. As a result, in the normal mode (non-time saving state), the first special symbol is variably displayed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, in most cases, after the big hit game state, first the first special symbol. Will be variably displayed.

Next, when the 10R big hit A symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol, it is controlled to a time saving state after the end of the big hit game state. At this time, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, as a variation time of the first special symbol, a long variation time (120 seconds in this example) longer than the normal variation time regardless of the result of the hit determination. The variable display will be displayed. Then, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variably displayed in a long variability time, a game aiming at passage of a game ball to the gate portion 2003 is performed.

When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 during the chance mode described above, it is determined whether or not it is a universal symbol (normal determination), and the normal symbol is variably displayed based on the determination result. At this time, in the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display is performed in any of 2 to 21 seconds which is the variation time of the normal symbol set as the universal symbol variation pattern. That is, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variably displayed for a long variation time (120 seconds in this example), it is possible to make a normal determination up to about 60 times.

Further, in the case where the normal symbol stop mode in the above-mentioned chance mode is the universal symbol per symbol, as the opening time of the second starting opening door 2022 in the time saving state, it is controlled in the protruding state for 6 seconds. (2) The game ball can be received in the starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, the second reserved memory number, which is the memory number for the hit determination on the second special symbol side, increases, and the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state. Will be done.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, one of the big hit and the small hit is always obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if a small hit as a result of the hit determination on the side of the second special symbol, even one game ball is accepted in the second special winning opening 2005b during the small hit game state. One of them is always assigned to the V winning opening 2411. Further, in this example, if the right hit is continued during the small hitting game state, at least one ball is controlled to be received in the second big winning opening 2005b. That is, in the case of a small hit as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, it is a big hit in most cases, so it is practically a small hit as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. It can be said that they have acquired the right to be a big hit (winning right).

In the chance mode of this example, there is shown a case where a normal symbol is stopped and displayed twice as a regular symbol. In such a case, the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port door 2022 is in a protruding state, respectively, and is the second number of hit judgments stored on the second special symbol side. The number of reserved memories has increased by 2, and the right to be a big hit (winning right) has been obtained twice. In addition, in the chance mode of this example, in addition to performing the normal determination about 20 to 40 times, the probability that the result of the normal determination is a symbol per ordinary figure is set to 1/20. The average number of second reserved memories is increased by one or two, and the right to be a big hit (winning right) can be acquired once or twice.

Then, when the variable symbol is stopped as a symbol aspect according to the result of the hit determination with the first special symbol when the long variation time has elapsed after starting the variable display of the first special symbol, the state shifts to the non-time saving state. At the same time, the time for exercising the winning right shifts based on the fact that there are two second retained memories. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol when there is the second retained memory number, when the winning right exercise time is entered, the first retained memory number Regardless of whether or not there is a variable display of the second special symbol based on the second pending storage. At this time, in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display is performed in 2 seconds which is the variation time of the second special symbol in the non-time saving state.

During the winning right exercising time of this example, a case where the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol is shown. In such a case, the small hit game state is executed to make the second big winning opening 2005b into a state in which the game balls can be received, and the game balls winning the second big winning hole 2005b are distributed to the V winning holes 2411. The big hit game state is executed on the condition that it has been done, and the first special winning opening 2005 is opened (retracted state) as each round game of the big hit game state.

In addition, when the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hitting game state executed based on the fact that the second special symbol is the small hitting symbol, it is always in the time saving state after the big hitting game state ends. Control. Also, after the first big hit game state in the winning right exercising time, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed based on the second second reserved memory. At this time, in the variable display of the second special symbol, as in the non-time saving state, the variable display is performed in 2 seconds which is the variation time of the second special symbol in the time saving state. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol, the small hit game state is executed to make the second special winning opening 2005b in a state in which the game ball can be accepted, and the second big winning opening 2005b. The second big jackpot gaming state in the winning right exercising time will be executed on condition that the gaming balls that have been won are distributed to the V winning opening 2411.

It should be noted that, after the second big hit game state in the winning right exercising time is finished, the time saving state is continued and the mode is shifted to the chance mode again. That is, as long as the normal determination is won in the chance mode, it is possible to continue the advantageous state for the player who loops between the winning right time and the chance mode.

[12. About display contents of production display device]
FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing display contents of the effect display device 1600 in the chance mode. During the normal mode, the decorative design 1605 (left decorative design 1605a, middle decorative design 1605b, right decorative design 1605c) consisting of three columns of left, middle, and right is enlarged and displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, and the first special design is displayed. The variable display is synchronized with the variable display of. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, during the chance mode, the decorative pattern 1605 consisting of three columns of left, middle, and right is enlarged and displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600 as in the normal mode. The decorative symbol 1605 is not variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, but is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the ordinary symbol.

In the lower left part of the effect display device 1600, the first special symbol corresponding decorative display area 1606 that variably displays the first special symbol corresponding decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variation of the second special symbol. A second special figure corresponding decorative display area 1607 for variably displaying the second special figure corresponding decorative pattern corresponding to the display is provided. The first special figure corresponding decoration display area 1606 and the second special figure corresponding decoration display area 1607 are also displayed during the normal mode, and are displayed in the central portion of the effect display device 1600 during the normal mode. Even when a character or the like is displayed instead of the decorative pattern that is present, or when the decorative pattern displayed in the central portion of the effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the variable display of the normal symbol during the chance mode, The state of the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol can be confirmed.

In addition, in the lower right part of the effect display device 1600, a universal figure corresponding decorative display area 1608 is provided which variably displays the ordinary figure corresponding decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the ordinary symbol. The ordinary figure corresponding decoration display area 1608 is displayed during the normal mode as well as the first special figure corresponding decoration display area 1606 and the second special figure corresponding decoration display area 1607. When the decorative design displayed in the central part is synchronized with the variable display of the first special design, or during the chance mode, the decorative design displayed in the central part of the effect display device 1600 is replaced with a character or the like. Even in the case of doing, it is possible to confirm the state of the variable display of the normal symbols.

Further, the left end portion of the effect display device 1600 is provided with general symbol hold display areas 1609a to 1609d for displaying the number of reserved storages of normal symbols corresponding to the ordinary random number stored in the normal symbol hold storage area. At the right end of 1600, second special figure reservation display areas 1610a to 1610d for displaying the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area are provided. It should be noted that, as described above, the state in which there is the second reserved memory number is a state in which the right to substantially win the jackpot (winning right) is acquired, and thus the game ball is accepted into the second starting opening 2004 during the chance mode. By displaying the number of the second holding memory with a star mark, it is possible to recognize that a special holding has occurred.

Further, during the chance mode, a timer display area 1611 for displaying the remaining time of the chance mode is displayed below the effect display device 1600. As described above, the chance mode is controlled over a period in which the first special symbol is variably displayed with a long variation time (120 seconds), and within this period, the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003. A game aiming at hitting a normal figure is performed. The remaining time is displayed in the timer display area 1611 in a countdown method, and the player feels impatient and anxious by aiming for the occurrence of a general figure while being aware of the remaining time of the chance mode displayed in the timer display area 1611. If you play a game in a state of hugging and excitement and a universal ball hit occurs and the game ball is accepted into the second starting opening 2004, you can give a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction, Is improved.

Also, during the chance mode, a mode information display area 1612 is displayed in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600. The mode information display area 1612 notifies the player that the player is in the chance mode and right-handed, so that the player is not disadvantaged.

[13. About production in chance mode]
In the present embodiment, the game is started in the normal mode, the big hit is won in the normal mode, and the time saving state occurs after the big hit game state, so that the chance mode, which is a more advantageous state than the normal mode, shifts to, Effects using the effect display device 1600 in such a chance mode will be described with reference to FIG. 166.

First, during the chance mode, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is determined whether or not it is a universal symbol (ordinary determination), and in synchronization with the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on this determination result, the effect is produced. The display device 1600 displays a variable display of the decorative pattern. Then, when the stop pattern of the normal symbol is the universal symbol, the hit symbol is also displayed in the stop pattern of the decorative symbol, and the ball can enter the second starting opening 2004. At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the second reserved memory number, which is the memory number for the hit determination on the second special symbol side, increases.

Next, during the chance mode of displaying the first special symbol in a long variation time (120 seconds in this example), the remaining 10 seconds before the long variation time elapses (the variation of the first special symbol). At the stage of 110 seconds after starting the display), it is determined whether or not there is a second reserved memory number which is the number of hit determination memories on the second special symbol side. Then, in the remaining 10 seconds, if there is the second reserved memory number, the effect of whether or not the stop state of the decorative symbol becomes the winning symbol is continued as it is, and after the elapse of the long variation time, the (Ii) The time for exercising the right to win is transferred based on the fact that there is a number of reserved memories.

On the other hand, when there is no second reserved memory number at the stage of the remaining 10 seconds before the long variation time elapses, the decoration pattern stop mode hits as an effect using the effect display device 1600. In place of the effect of whether or not it becomes a symbol, the effect of whether or not the first special symbol in the variable display is stopped at the big hit symbol is executed. Specifically, an effect (last battle effect) is developed in a battle format as an effect of whether or not the first special symbol that is being variably displayed is stopped at the big hit symbol.

Then, if the first special symbol in the variable display is stopped by the big hit symbol, you win the battle in the last battle production when the long fluctuation time elapses, and then the variable display of the first special symbol stops at the big hit symbol. The jackpot gaming state is executed based on what is done.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol in variable display is stopped with a missing symbol, you lose the battle in the last battle production when the long variation time elapses, and the final battle production is in progress (long variation time elapses). It is determined whether or not the second number of pending storages has increased in the remaining 10 seconds (before the execution). That is, at the stage of the remaining 10 seconds, which is before the long fluctuation time has elapsed, there is no second pending storage number, but when the long fluctuation time has elapsed after the remaining 10 seconds, the second pending storage number is reached. Judge whether or not there is.

Then, at the stage of the remaining 10 seconds before the long fluctuation time has elapsed, there is no second reserved memory number, but when there is the second reserved memory number when the long fluctuation time has elapsed, After the battle is defeated in the final battle production, the revival production that wins the battle is executed, and then the winning right exercising time is entered based on the second number of retained memories. In addition, when executing the revival effect, from the time when the long fluctuation time has elapsed (at the time of losing the battle in the last battle effect), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is subsequently started based on the second reserved memory. In, in the period until the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the revival effect is executed. On the other hand, in the remaining 10 seconds before the long fluctuation time elapses, there is no second pending storage number, and when the long fluctuation time has elapsed, there is no second pending storage number. The defeat of the battle in the final battle production is not overturned, and then the normal mode (non-time saving state) is entered based on the fact that there is no second reserved memory number.

[14. Concerning the secrecy of the second hold memory during the chance mode and exercise time of winning rights]
In this embodiment, the game is started in the normal mode, the big hit is won in the normal mode, and the time saving state occurs after the big hit game state, so that the chance mode, which is a more advantageous state than the normal mode, shifts to the chance mode. If a second hold storage occurs during the second hold storage, it is notified when the second hold storage occurs, but if a predetermined confidentiality condition is met, the second hold storage occurs However, the fact is not notified and the fact is notified after the second hold storage occurs.

First, when the concealment condition is satisfied when the second hold storage occurs, the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 during the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state during the winning right exercising time. Are listed. Also, the variation display of the normal symbol is started just before the end of the big hit game state in the winning right exercising time, and after the end of the big hit game state, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the normal figure hit symbol. The case where 2004 becomes a ball entry possible state, and the game ball entered the second starting opening 2004 which became the ball entry possible state is mentioned. In addition, in the entry possible state of the second starting opening 2004 in the chance mode, in the entry possible state of the first time (the opening of the second starting opening 2004 once), the second starting opening 2004 and the following The case where the game ball of is entered. In addition, there is a case where a game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 immediately before the end of the chance mode (for example, less than 10 seconds, during execution of the last battle effect described above).

When the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied and the occurrence of the second reserved storage is concealed, the fact that the second reserved storage has already occurred is notified at a predetermined timing. For example, when the battle is won in the last battle production described above. In addition, as the predetermined timing, the execution of the jackpot gaming state during the winning right exercising time can be mentioned. In this example, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the big hit game state. For example, is the occurrence of the second hold storage hidden in the fourth round? You may perform the button production which notifies whether or not. In such a button effect, when the operation button 410 is operated, the fact that the occurrence of the second hold storage is hidden is notified, and when the operation button 410 is not operated, the occurrence of the second hold storage is hidden. Do not let you know that In addition, the button effect may be executed even when the occurrence of the second reserved memory is not hidden. In such a case, when the operation button 410 is operated in the button effect, the occurrence of the second reserved memory is hidden. It is supposed to inform that it has not been done. Further, as the predetermined timing, the ending effect indicating the end of the chance mode is being executed after the end of the chance mode, and the ending effect is being executed.

As described above, during execution of the jackpot gaming state during the winning right exercising time, it may be notified that the second pending memory has occurred, but during the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol While executing the small hit game state based on that is displayed as a small hit pattern, it is not possible to enter the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hit game state, a big hit game state occurs There are times when you don't. In such a case, after the end of the small hitting game state, an ending effect (for example, displaying "sorry" on the effect display device 1600) indicating the end of the small hitting game state can be executed (the present embodiment). 5 seconds) is provided, but during the ending period, not the ending effect that indicates the end of the small hitting game state, but the effect (continuation effect) that notifies that the second hold memory has already occurred is executed. do it.

In addition, when the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied a plurality of times and the occurrence of the plurality of second reserved storages is concealed, it is possible to notify that the plurality of second reserved storages are generated at a predetermined timing. Alternatively, it may be notified that only one second pending storage has occurred.

By the way, in the case of notifying that when the second reserved storage occurs, the content of the notification is, depending on whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the limit number (four in this example). It is changing. Specifically, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, when the number of second reserved memories does not reach the limit number, an effect of notifying that one second reserved memory has occurred is executed, When the number of the second holding storages reaches the limit number, as a subsequent production, a special production (a special movie, etc.) that is not normally executed is executed. As a result, when the special effect is executed, it can be recognized that the second reserved storage number has reached the limit number. In addition, when the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied, regardless of whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the limit number, the fact is not notified when the second reserved storage occurs, but (2) When the number of stored memories reaches the limit number, the above special effect is executed. As a result, even when the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied, it is possible to recognize that the second reserved memory number has reached the limit number at least by executing the special effect, and the second start opening 2004 in the chance mode. It is designed to avoid unnecessary driving. In addition, when the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied, after the second hold storage has occurred, the effect of notifying that the second hold storage has already occurred is executed at a predetermined timing, but When the special effect is executed, such an effect is not executed.

Next, a specific example of concealing that the second reserved storage has occurred will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 170.

First, the first specific example will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 167, in the chance mode, a case is shown in which one second reserved memory, which is the number of hit determination memories on the second special symbol side, occurs. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect that notifies that effect when one second hold storage is generated is executed. Then, after the chance mode ends, the winning right exercising time shifts based on the occurrence of one second reserved memory, but during the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol stops with a small hit symbol. The small hitting game state is executed on the basis of being displayed, and the big hitting game state is executed on condition that the game ball winning the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hitting playing state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411. doing. During such a big hit game state, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second hold memory occurs, the second big winning port 2005b in the big hit game state is concentrated on entering the ball. Therefore, when the second hold storage occurs, the fact is not notified.

Then, after that, when the big hit game state being executed ends, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, an ending period (5 seconds in this embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game state can be executed. Although it is provided, during the ending period, not the ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game state, but the effect display device 1600 displays "Still still!" to notify that the second hold storage has occurred. The continuous production is carried out, and it is recognized that the winning right exercise time will continue. In the ending period, after the ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game state is executed, for example, when 3 seconds have passed, the effect may be switched to the continuous effect and executed. In this way, the winning right exercising time ends by not notifying that when the second reserved memory occurs, but notifying that during the execution of the ending effect after the second reserved memory occurs. Then, it is possible to turn around from the recognition that the player is surprised.

Next, a second specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 168. In FIG. 168, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started immediately before the end of the big hit game state before the start of the chance mode, and the stop mode of the ordinary symbol becomes the ordinary symbol per symbol after the start of the chance mode, and the second in the time saving state. It is shown that the opening time of the starting opening door 2022 is controlled to be in a protruding state for 6 seconds to allow a game ball to enter the second starting opening 2004. As for the variable display of the ordinary symbols that have spread before and after the start of the chance mode, since the effect using the effect display device 1600 has not been executed, the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 after the start of the chance mode. Even when the player has entered the ball and the second reserved memory has occurred, the fact is not notified when the second reserved memory occurs.

Then, if the fact is not notified when the second hold storage occurs, the last battle effect (FIG. 166) is performed during the remaining 10 seconds before the end of the chance mode (before the elapse of the long variation time). See) is running. In such a final battle production, the player loses the battle at the end of the chance mode (when the long fluctuation time elapses), but after the end of the chance mode (after the long fluctuation time elapses), the battle loses. By executing the revival production to win the battle, it is recognized that the winning right exercise time will start after the variation display of the first special symbol. In this way, when the variable display of the normal symbols is crossed before and after the start of the chance mode, the fact that the second reserved memory is generated immediately after the start of the chance mode is not notified and the occurrence of the second reserved memory is generated. By notifying the fact later, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by reversing the recognition that the winning right exercising time is not started.

In the second specific example, the case where the second hold storage occurs only immediately after the start of the chance mode is shown, but based on the fact that the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 during the chance mode. When the second second hold memory is generated, and when the second second hold memory is generated, the fact is notified, and the transition to the jackpot gaming state within the winning right exercise time is confirmed. There is. In such a case, the winning right exercising time shifts based on the occurrence of two second reserved memories, but during the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. The small hitting game state is executed based on that, and the big hitting game state is executed on condition that the game ball winning the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hitting playing state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411. There is. While such a big hit game state is being executed, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but in a predetermined round, the second hold storage occurs immediately after the start of the chance mode. The additional effect for notifying that the winning right exercising time is continued after the jackpot gaming state is finished is recognized. In this way, the right to exercise the winning right is notified when the second hold storage occurs immediately after the start of the chance mode, but not to that effect during the jackpot gaming state during the time when the right to exercise the winning right. It is possible to give a surprise to the player by reversing from the recognition that the time is over.

Next, a third specific example will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 169, in the chance mode, when the stop mode of the normal symbol is the regular symbol per symbol, as the opening time of the second starting opening door 2022 in the time saving state, the protrusion state is controlled for 6 seconds. It becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004, but two game balls enter the second starting port 2004 in the protruding state, and the number of memories for hit determination on the second special symbol side. It is shown that the two second reserved memories that occur are consecutively generated. As a general rule, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state, but before the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state. The second game ball may enter the second starting opening 2004. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect that notifies that effect when one second hold storage is generated is executed. However, at the time when the second second hold memory is generated, in order to be aware that one game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state. , I didn't tell you that.

Then, after the chance mode ends, the winning right exercising time shifts based on the occurrence of two second reserved memories, but during the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol stops with a small hit symbol. The small hitting game state is executed on the basis of being displayed, and the big hitting game state is executed on condition that the game ball winning the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hitting playing state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411. doing. While such a big hit game state is being executed, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but in a predetermined round, the second second hold memory is set during the chance mode. An additional effect for informing that it has occurred is executed to recognize that the winning right exercising time will continue after the jackpot gaming state ends. In this way, during the chance mode, during the execution of the jackpot gaming state based on the occurrence of the first second hold storage without notifying that when the second second hold storage occurs. By notifying the fact, it is possible to change the recognition from the recognition that the winning right exercising time is over, and give the player unexpectedness.

Next, a fourth specific example will be described with reference to FIG. The fourth specific example shows a case where the last battle effect shown in FIG. 166 is not executed.
FIG. 170 shows a case in which one second reserved memory, which is the number of hit determination memories on the second special symbol side, occurs during the chance mode. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect that notifies that effect when one second hold storage is generated is executed. Then, the variable display of the normal symbol is started immediately before the end of the chance mode (less than 3 seconds remaining), and the stop mode of the normal symbol becomes the normal symbol per symbol before and after the end of the chance mode, and the second starting door in the time saving state The opening time of 2022 may be controlled to the protruding state for 6 seconds to allow the game ball to enter the second starting opening 2004. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 before and after such an end of the chance mode and a second hold memory is generated, it is not possible to notify the fact during the chance mode, and the second hold is held. It did not notify when the memory occurred.

And after the chance mode ends, the winning right exercising time shifts based on the occurrence of the second holding memory, but during the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. The small hitting game state is executed based on that, and the big hitting game state is executed on condition that the game ball winning the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hitting playing state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411. There is. While such a big hit game state is being executed, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but in a predetermined round, the second hold storage occurs before and after the end of the chance mode. The additional effect for notifying that the winning right exercising time is continued after the jackpot gaming state is finished is recognized. In this way, when the second hold storage occurs before and after the end of the chance mode, the fact is not notified, and when the big hit game state is executed based on the occurrence of the first second hold storage, that effect is executed. By notifying that the winning right exercising time is over, it is possible to give a surprising effect to the player.

In the fourth specific example, before the end of the chance mode (less than 3 seconds remaining), the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 and the first second reserved memory is generated. Based on the above, there is shown a case of shifting to the big hitting game state at the winning right exercising time, but at that time, the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 2004, and the big hitting game at the winning right exercising time is shown. The transition to the state may not be confirmed. In such a case, for example, the second hold memory is generated based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004 immediately before the end of the chance mode (less than 3 seconds remaining), and the second hold memory is generated. If the fact is not notified at this point in time, during the ending period (5 seconds in this embodiment) in which the ending effect indicating the end of the chance mode can be executed after the end of the chance mode, the chance mode is about to end (3 seconds remaining). It is also possible to execute an additional effect for notifying that the second reserved memory has occurred and to recognize that the winning right exercising time is started after the end of the chance mode. Further, for example, when the second hold memory is generated based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004 after the end of the chance mode, and when the second hold memory is not notified to that effect During the display of the variation of the first special symbol (loss variation) performed after the end of the chance mode (after the ending effect of the chance mode), it is notified that the second hold memory has occurred after the end of the chance mode. You may recognize that the winning right exercising time is started after the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Even with these, the winning right exercising time is not started by notifying the fact that the second reserved memory is generated before and after the termination of the chance mode and notifying the fact after the second reserved memory is generated. It is possible to give a surprise to the player by reversing from the recognition.

[15. Example of production]
Next, a mode example of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 will be described. FIG. 171 is an example of the effect display that is executed when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004 during the chance mode by controlling the transition from the normal mode to the chance mode, and FIG. 172 is the second during the chance mode. FIG. 173 is an example of an effect display executed when the chance mode is ended without accepting a game ball in the starting opening 2004, and FIG. 173 shows that the second reserved storage number is when the remaining time of the chance mode is 10 seconds. It is an example of the effect display during the last battle effect that is executed if it is not, and the game ball is accepted in the second starting opening 2004 when it is lost as a result of the variable display in the long variable time of the first special symbol. FIG. 174 is an example of the effect display executed at times, and FIG. 174 is an example of the effect display executed in the last battle effect when a big hit is obtained as a result of the change display in the long change time of the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 171(A), as a result of the hit determination on the side of the first special symbol, the big hit (10R big hit A) which is controlled in a time saving state after the big hit game state is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol. Then, the first special map corresponding decorative display area 1606 is variably displayed, and the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 1605 are variably displayed, and after the lapse of a predetermined period, the first special figure corresponding decorative display area. When the big hit pattern of the first special map corresponding decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at 1606 and the big hit pattern of the left, middle and right decorative patterns 1605 is stopped and displayed, after the big hit is notified, the big hit game state is controlled. It starts (FIG. 171(B)). Note that, as shown in FIG. 171(A), during the normal mode, the effect display device 1600 has the above-mentioned first special figure corresponding decoration display area 1606, second special figure corresponding decoration display area 1607, and general figure corresponding decoration display area 1608. In addition to the above, first special figure reservation display areas 1613a to 1613d for displaying the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special random number stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area are provided at the bottom.

Then, after the jackpot gaming state, the fact that the chance mode (time saving state) is controlled is notified, and the right information is displayed in the mode information display area 1612 (FIG. 171(C)), and the first reserved memory number is 0. When it disappears, the first special symbol is variably displayed with a long variation time, and the first special symbol corresponding decorative display region is variably displayed in the first special symbol corresponding decorative display area 1606 in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. (FIG. 171(D)). As described above, during the chance mode, the timer display area 1610 indicating the remaining time of the chance mode is displayed, and the timer display area 1610 is displayed according to the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. The remaining time will be updated and displayed.

In addition, when the number of reserved storages of ordinary symbols is not 0, in synchronization with the variable display of ordinary symbols, the ordinary symbol corresponding decorative symbols are variably displayed in the ordinary symbol corresponding decorative display area 1608 and the left, middle and right ornaments are displayed. The design 1605 is variably displayed, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, the universal design corresponding decorative display region 1608 is stopped and displayed with a design corresponding to the universal design with a design according to the result of the lottery process for the normal design, and the left, middle and right decorations are also displayed. The symbol 1605 is stopped and displayed as a symbol according to the result of the lottery process for the ordinary symbol (FIG. 171(E)). At this time, if the result of the lottery process (ordinary determination) for the ordinary symbol is a normal hit, the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol corresponding decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the universal symbol corresponding decorative display area 1608, and the left, middle and right ornaments are displayed. The hit design of the design 1605 is stopped and displayed (FIG. 171(F)).

The main control board 1310, when the normal symbol hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 is moved forward to make it project for a predetermined period. The state of the starting port 2004 is controlled to an open state in which the game ball can be received. Then, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004 during the opening state of the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol is held, the effect display device 1600 displays "big hit get" and second. The star mark of the area (the second special figure reservation display area 1610a in the example of FIG. 171 (G)) corresponding to the generated reservation among the special figure reservation display areas 1610a to 1610d is displayed in a special mode (for example, red). By doing so, the fact that the right to be a big hit (the right to win) is obtained is notified (FIG. 171(G)).

After that, if there is the remaining time in the chance mode and the number of stored ordinary symbols, the ordinary symbol corresponding decorative symbol is variably displayed in the ordinary symbol corresponding ornament display area 1608 in synchronization with the variable symbol display of the ordinary symbol. -The right decorative pattern 1605 is variably displayed (FIG. 171(H)).

Further, when the game ball is not accepted in the second starting opening 2004 during the chance mode and the remaining time of the chance mode becomes 10 seconds (FIGS. 172(A) to 172(C)), the last battle effect is produced in this example. By executing it, the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is suggested. That is, as shown in FIG. 172(C), the player's character A and the enemy character B are displayed in place of the left, middle, and right decorative designs, and the duel scene between the character A and the enemy character B is displayed. (FIG. 172(D)).

Then, if the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a loss, after displaying a mode in which the character A is defeated by the enemy character (FIG. 172(E)), if the second reserved memory number is 0, a chance is given. After notifying the player of ending the mode and ending of the chance mode (FIG. 172(F)), control of the normal mode is started (FIG. 172(G)).

In this way, when the remaining time in the chance mode becomes very short, by performing the effect display that is different from the normal display in the chance mode, not only the player's impatience and anxiety but also the expectation for a big hit are expected. By making them hug you, you can improve the fun of playing games.

Even when the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is lost, when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004 and the second special symbol is held during execution of the last battle effect (( 173(C) to 173(D)), after displaying the mode in which the character A is defeated by the enemy character (FIG. 173(D)), the mode in which the character A is revived is displayed (FIG. 173). 173(E)).

Then, the chance mode is ended and the winning right exercise time is controlled to be controlled, and the second special symbol corresponding decorative pattern is variably displayed in the second special symbol corresponding decorative display area 1607 in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. Together with the left/middle/right decorative design 1605 is variably displayed, and if the result of the hit determination on the second special design side is a small hit, the second special design corresponding to the second special design corresponds to the second special design after a predetermined period has elapsed. The small hitting design of the decorative design is stopped and displayed, and the small hitting designs of the left, middle and right decorative designs 1605 are stopped and displayed (FIG. 173(F)).

The main control board 1310, when the small hitting design of the second special design is stopped and displayed on the second special design display 1405, the game ball can be received in the second special winning opening 2005b for a predetermined period, The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays "Aim for V!" on the effect display device 1600 to notify the player to continue right-handing so as to aim at the V winning opening 2411 (FIG. 173(G)). Then, based on the fact that the game balls have been accepted into the second special winning opening 2005b and one of the game balls has been distributed to the V winning opening 2411, it is notified that a "big hit" has occurred, and the big hit gaming state. Control is performed (FIG. 173(H)).

In this way, not only the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side, but also the result of the last battle effect is changed according to the occurrence of the number of retained memories on the second special symbol side, so that a big hit can be strongly expected. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

When the result of the hit determination on the side of the first special symbol is a big hit, after displaying a mode in which the character A wins over the enemy character as a result of the last battle effect (FIG. 174(E)), the big hit game state. Control (FIG. 174(F)).

After the jackpot gaming state, if there is no second reserved memory number, it is controlled to shift to the chance mode again (FIG. 174(C)), and if there is a second reserved memory number, it is controlled to shift to the winning right exercising time. Become.

If the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a big hit, when the chance mode ends, the big hit based on the fact that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol regardless of the presence or absence of the second reserved memory number. The control of the gaming state is executed. Then, after the jackpot gaming state is over, if there is a second reserved memory number, it shifts to the winning right exercise time and the variable display of the second special symbol is started. That is, the benefit of the jackpot gaming state on the first special symbol side is given prior to the exercise of the right to be a jackpot accumulated during the chance mode.

In addition, the final battle production basically changes the result depending on the result of the winning lottery on the first special symbol side, but at least the chance mode ends without notifying the player of that fact. Until then, it is concealed to the player that the first special symbol was a big hit. As a result, the player who recognizes that he/she will exercise the right to be a jackpot accumulated during the chance mode can be given the unexpected benefit of the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the game is added to the game. The interest can be improved. Further, as described above, if the second reserved memory number is not 0, the second special symbol is variably displayed with priority over the first special symbol. Therefore, after the big hit game state based on the first special symbol being stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the winning right exercising time shifts to the state of exercising the right to be a big jackpot accumulated in the chance mode. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the interest in the game is deteriorated due to the fact that the opportunity to exercise the right to be a big hit accumulated during the chance mode does not come easily.

In addition, as described above, when the right exercising time is right-handed, the game ball can be won in the second big winning opening 2005b, and the game ball that has won the second big winning opening 2005b is in the V winning opening 2411. Even if a big hit game state occurs after being sorted out, by continuing right-handedness, it is possible to make a game ball win the first big winning opening 2005. That is, after the shift control to the chance mode, the right stroke is continued until the shift control to the normal mode is performed again.

Further, in this example, even when the player hits the game ball to the right, the game ball can be received in the first right starting opening 2002b, so normally, the shift to the chance mode is controlled until the chance mode ends or the winning right. A game ball can be accepted into the first right starting opening 2002b within the period until the exercise time is finished, and the first reserved memory number is set at the end of the chance mode or the winning right exercise time. Has become. That is, it shifts to the chance mode and aims to enter the second starting opening 2004, or shifts to the winning right exercising time and executes the jackpot gaming state for the number of second reserved memories to win the prize ball. During the period, it is possible to generate a condition relating to the next game (acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2002).

If the game ball is accepted into the first starting opening 2002 (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b) during the chance mode or during the winning right exercising time, the fact is notified. Good (not limited to the display for notifying that the game ball has been accepted in the first starting opening 2002 (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b), but notifying by voice or lamp etc. In addition, the effect display device 1600 is provided with an area for displaying the first reserved memory number even during the chance mode or during the winning right exercising time, and the first starting opening 2002 (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting). The display of the number of reserved memories may be updated when the game ball is received in the mouth 2002b). As a result, the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b) during the right exercising time, so that the game mode is entered again and the long fluctuation of the first special symbol occurs. It is possible to recognize that the time varying display is started, and it is possible to enhance the interest for the acquisition of the right (winning right) to be a big hit.

In addition, as described above, during the chance mode, a game of accumulating a hold of the second special symbol (second special random number) is performed. Since the upper limit of the number of second reserved memories is 4, it is possible to store a maximum of four second special symbols (second special random number) reserved during the chance mode. In this example, when the number of second reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4 in the chance mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a replaces the display of the decorative pattern or the timer display area 1611 on the effect display device 1600 with the special effect (special movie). May be executed). That is, when the number of second reserved memories reaches 4, which is the upper limit, the player stops driving the game ball until the winning right exercising time is reached, and therefore a special effect (such as playing a special movie) is executed. It is possible to eliminate the lack of handheld.

In addition, since the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is increased based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the right strike is performed during the normal chance mode. A prompt (mode information display area 1612) is displayed. On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a special effect (flowing a special movie, etc.) on the effect display device 1600 based on the number of the second reserved memories reaching the upper limit of 4 in the chance mode, the right The display (mode information display area 1612) prompting for hitting disappears. As a result, unnecessary driving can be avoided so as not to be a disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to avoid a decrease in the enjoyment of the game by being prompted for unnecessary driving. In addition, in this case, the display is not limited to the display that prompts the player to hit the right side (mode information display area 1612), and may be any display that is suppressed (a conservative display) compared to the normal display state in the chance mode. , For example, reducing the display (mode information display area 1612) urging right-handing, thinning the characters (semi-transparent), changing the display position to an inconspicuous position, etc. You may

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the long variation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds, and it is configured to control to the chance mode only during this period. It is also possible to control to a plurality of types of chance modes having different degrees of advantage due to different periods. For example, two types of 68 seconds and 128 seconds are provided as the long variation time of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the first special symbol is started in a time saving state, it is decided to be one of them based on the variation random number. Good.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the result of the hit determination on the side of the first special symbol is a big hit (10R big hit A in this example) that is controlled to a time saving state after the big hit game state, after the big hit game state In the time saving state, the first special symbol is variably displayed with a long variation time, and the second special symbol is reserved (second special random number) within this long variation time, and a big hit corresponding to the second reserved memory number. Is sequentially generated after the lapse of a long variation time, and then the game of displaying the first special symbol in a variably long variation time can be repeatedly executed. As described above, the state in which the second special symbol is held (the state in which the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004) is a state in which the right to be a big hit (the winning right) is substantially obtained. , "Special information linked to a big hit" can be paraphrased.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to realize a novel game property having a cycle of repeating a state of storing special information linked to a hit and a state of sequentially releasing hits corresponding to the number of the special information accumulated. As a result, not only the game that simply waits for a new hit after the end of the big hit game state is executed, but also "how much special information that leads to a hit is stored within the time limit (long fluctuation time) (storage) It is possible to play with both the tension of accumulating special information within the time limit and the satisfaction of gaining profit (big hit game state) collectively after the time limit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement of the game after the big hit game state.

In addition, the configuration of storing the second special symbol hold (second special random number) during the variable display of the first special symbol requires at least the following conditions.
"Variation time of the first special symbol during the time saving state> (Variation time of the ordinary symbol during the time saving state + maximum time during which the second starting opening door 2022 is in a protruding state when hitting the universal symbol during the time saving state) x N ( N≧2)”
That is, it is possible to execute the variable display of the normal symbol a plurality of times within the variable period of the first special symbol, and to control the state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 when the universal symbol hits a plurality of times. It needs to be possible.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and the invention is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko Machine 2 Outer Frame 3 Door Frame 4 Body Frame 5 Game Board 5a Game Area 6 CR Unit 10 Upper Frame Member 11 Engagement Notch 12 Mounting Step 20 Lower Frame Member 21 Engagement Notch 22 Front End Notch 30 Left Frame Member 31 Recessed portion 32 Protruded portion 40 Right frame member 41 Recessed portion 42 Protruded portion 50 Curtain plate member 51 Rear extended portion 52 Left discharge hole 53 Right discharge hole 54 Standing wall portion 55 Return portion 56 Left mounting portion 57 Right mounting portion 60 Outer frame side Upper hinge member 61 Upper fixing part 62 Front extension part 63 Bearing groove 64 Horizontal fixing part 65 Hanging part 66 Lock member 66a Lock body 66b Operating part 66c Elastic part 66d Mounting hole 67 Mounting screw 70 Outer frame side lower hinge member 71 Horizontal part 72 Rising portion 73 Lower hinge pin for outer frame 74 Discharge hole
80 curtain plate reinforcing member 81 left sliding member 82 right sliding member 85 connecting member 85A upper left connecting member 85B upper right connecting member 85C lower left connecting member 85D lower right connecting member 86 horizontal fixing portion 87 upper lateral fixing portion 88 lower lateral fixing portion 89 bent portion 90 Upper hook member 91 Lower hook member 95 Guide vane 96 Guide vane 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame base 111 Through hole 112 Handle mounting seat surface 113 Cylinder mounting portion 114 Cylinder insertion hole 115 Ball feed opening 116 Passage hole for lower tray 117 Passage Port for Upper Plate 118 Glass Unit Attachment 119 Speaker Insertion Port 130 Reinforcement Unit 131 Upper Reinforcement Sheet Metal 132 Middle Reinforcement Sheet Metal 132a Cutout 133 Left Reinforcement Sheet Metal 134 Right Reinforcement Sheet Metal 135 Locking Locking Part 140 Door Frame Side Upper Hinge Member 141 Door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141a Projecting piece 142 Door frame upper hinge pin 143 Collar member 144 Lock spring 150 Door frame side lower hinge member 151 Door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151a Extension piece 152 Door frame lower hinge pin 160 Door frame left side decorative substrate 161 Decorative board 161a LED on the left side of the door frame
162 Door frame lower left side decorative board 162a LED
170 Glass Unit Mounting Member 171 Base Part 172 Projection Part 180 Handle Mounting Member 181 Cylindrical Part 182 Flange Part 183 Projection 184 Reinforcing Rib 190 Glass Unit 191 Glass Frame 191a Mounting Piece 191b Engagement Piece 192 Glass Plate 194 Frame Decorative Amplifier Board 194a +9V Creation circuit 200 Security cover 201 Main body 202 Rear protrusion 203 Locking piece 210 Opening/closing cylinder unit 211 Cylinder lock 211a Keyhole 212 Rotation transmitting member 212a Notch 213 Cylinder mounting plate 213a Front plate 213b Side plate 213c Mounting plate 250 Ball feed Unit 251 Front cover 251a Inlet 251b Ball outlet 251c Slit 252 Rear cover 252a Hitting ball supply port 252b Mounting recess 253 Ball removing member 253a Partition 253b Rotating rod 253c Operating rod 253d Weight blocking 254 Ball feed 254 Holding part 254c Rod part 255 Ball feed solenoid 256 Ball feed actuating rod 257 Ball feed crank 257a Engagement part 257b Shaft part 257c Transmission part 260 Tamper proof member 261 Upper piece part 262 Lower piece part 263 Inclination part 270 Foul cover unit 271 Unit body 272 Lid member 273 Through ball passage 274 Full ball receiving port 275 Fal ball receiving port 276 Ball discharging port 277 Storage passage 278 Moving piece 279 Full tank detecting sensor 280 Spring 281 Door opening/closing contact part 300 Handle unit 301 Handle base 301a Base part 301b Front end 301c Groove 302 Handle 302a First protrusion 302b Second protrusion 302c Third protrusion 302d Fourth protrusion 302e Slit 302f Locking protrusion 303 Handle cover 303a Mounting boss 304 Inner base 305 Shaft member 305a Drive gear 306 Transmission gear 307 Handle Rotation detection sensor 307a Detection shaft 308 Handle return spring 309 Auxiliary spring 310 Handle touch sensor 311 Single button 312 Single button operation sensor 315 Handle relay terminal plate 320 Dish unit 321 Upper plate 321a Induction passage part 321b Ground metal plate 322 Lower plate 322a Lower plate Ball removal hole (lower plate outlet)
322b Escape part 322c Sphere guide part (guide means)
322d Buffer unit (guide means)
322e Return part (guide means)
323 Dish unit base 323a Upper plate ball supply port 323b Speaker slit 323c Lower plate ball supply port (lower plate supply port)
323d Upper plate ball feed port 323e Ball feed guideway 323f Ball guide route 323g Opening part 323h Handle insertion port 323i Cylinder insertion port 324 Upper plate body 325 Lower plate body 325A Main body part 325B First expansion part 325C Second expansion part 325a Bottom Wall 325b Main body standing wall 326 Dish unit cover (cover)
326a Performance operation unit mounting portion (covering portion)
326b Plate front upper decorative part 326c Plate front lower decorative part 326d Lower plate opening 326e Lower speaker port 326f Handle insertion port 326g Cylinder insertion port 326h Top plate part 326i Bottom plate part 326j Mounting space 327 Upper plate ball removal button (discharging operation part)
327a Operation transmission section 327b Ball removal slider 327c Upper plate ball removal spring 328 Ball lending button 329 Return button 330 Ball loan return display section 331 Production selection left button 332 Production selection right button 333 Bottom dish ball removal button 334 Lid member 335 Bottom dish ball Extraction base 335a Discharge port 340 Lower tray cover 340a Cover standing wall 340b Ceiling 365 Degree display plate 365a Ball lending switch 365b Return switch 365d CR unit lamp A1 Lower tray first area A2 Lower tray second area PL Split line 400 Rendering operation unit (Coating part)
400A Second production operation unit (cover)
410 Operation button (operation receiving part)
411 Button lens 411a First button decoration 411b Second button decoration 412 Button frame 412a Frame opening 413 Button base 413a Main body 413b Flange 413c Guide boss 413d Detection piece 413e Base opening 415 Frame unit 416 Frame main 416a Central Opening 416b Peripheral opening 416c Cutout 416d Inner tube 416e Attachment 417 Frame side lens 418 Frame top lens 420 Board unit 421 Board base 422 Operation button Left outer decorative board 422a First LED
422b Second LED
423 operation button right outside decorative substrate 423a first LED
423b Second LED
424 Vibration motor 424a Weight 425 Motor cover 430 Base unit 431 Unit base 431a Through hole 431b Holding hole 431c Light-shielding wall part 432 Operation button inner decorative member 432a Peripheral wall part 432b Front plate part 432c Opening part 432d Flange part 432f First mounting boss 4 Inner decoration 423g Second button Inner decoration 433 Operation button Left inner decoration board 434 Operation button Right inner decoration board 435 Operation button Upper inner decoration board 436 Operation button Lower inner decoration board 437 Frame top lens Decorative board 438 Operation button Spring 439 Sensor holder 440 Press detection sensor 441 Production operation unit Relay board 442 Relay board cover 442a Leg section 450 Second base unit 451 Unit base 451a Main body section 451b Cover section 451c Through hole 451d Holding hole 451e Upper bearing section 451f Lower bearing section 451g Rotation restriction section 452 Button shaft 454 Press detection sensor 460 Door frame side effect display device (second effect display means)
460A Door frame side second effect display device 461 Liquid crystal display device 462 Mounting bracket 470 Screen unit 471 Main screen 472 Sub screen 472a Peripheral decorative part 472b Screen part 473 Upper shaft member 474 Lower shaft member 475 Operating gear member 475a Gear tooth 475b Stopper 475c Detecting piece 476 Sub-screen decoration member 477 Sub-screen decoration substrate 477a LED
478 Peripheral decorative member 480 Upper bearing member 481 Bearing member 481a Recessed portion 482 Frame top lens decorative substrate 485 Lower bearing member 490 Rotational drive unit 491 Unit case 492 Switching drive motor 495 Second transmission gear 500 Projector 501 Projector body 502 Lens unit 505 Projector Mounting member 505a Slit 506 Upper cover 507 Rotation detection sensor 510 Buffer unit 511 Buffer member 512 Buffer base 512a Main body 512b Leg piece 515 Second effect operation unit Relay board 516 Relay board cover 530 Door frame left side unit 531 Left unit base 531a Aperture 532 Left unit Diffusing lens member 532A Upper diffusing lens member 532B Lower diffusing lens member 532a Circular lens part 532b Square lens part 532c Central diffuse reflecting part 532d Front diffusing lens part 532e Input lens part 532f Front reflecting part 534 Left unit decorative base 535 Left unit lower decorative base 536 Left unit decorative cover 537 Decorative member 550 Door frame right side unit 551 Right unit base 552 Door frame right side decorative board 552A Door frame right side upper decorative board 552B Door frame right side Lower decorative board 552a Left LED
552b Right LED
552c Medium LED
553 right unit left diffusion lens member 553a main body portion 553b rear wall portion 553c notch portion 553d accommodation recess 553e input lens portion 553f side reflection portion 554 right unit left decorative member 555 right unit left cover 556 right unit right diffusion lens member 556a main body portion 556b Rear wall portion 556c Cutout portion 556d Housing concave portion 556e Input lens portion 556f Side reflection portion 557 Right unit right decorative member 558 Right unit right cover 559 right unit left light shielding member 559a main body portion 559b rear wall portion 559c cutout portion 559d reinforcing portion 560 right unit Right shading member 561 Right unit decorative lens member 561a Circular decorative portion 561b Multi-faceted decorative portion 562 Right unit decorative base 563 Right unit cover 564 Decorative member 570 Door frame top unit 571 Central base 572 Side base 573 Upper speaker 574 Unit body 574a Opening 574b Slit 574c Upper opening 574d Lower opening 574e Top left decorative portion 574f Top right decorative portion 575 Speaker cover 576 Top middle decorative member 577 Door frame top middle decorative substrate 578 Light guide member 578a Straight part 578b Arc part 578c Diffuse reflection part 578d Diffuse reflection part Input part 579 Top left decorative lens member 579a Decorative lens part 580 Top right decorative lens member 580a Decorative lens part 581 Top middle left decorative member 582 Top middle right decorative member 583 Door frame Top left decorative substrate 583a LED
584 Door frame top right decorative board 584a LED
585 Substrate base 586 Door frame top Middle left decorative substrate 586a LED
587 Door frame top middle right decorative board 587a LED
588 Light-shielding member 589 Door frame top unit Relay board 590 Relay board cover 591 Upper cover 592 Lower cover CL Central axis (of operation button 410)
600 main body frame base 601 game board insertion opening 602 game board mounting portion 603 game board restriction portion 604 launcher mounting portion 605 cylinder insertion opening 606 connection opening portion 607 speaker opening portion 608 rear extension portion 609 upper hinge mounting portion 610 Lower hinge mounting part 615 Opening cover 616 Game board lock member 618 Door frame opening switch 619 Body frame opening switch 620 Body frame side upper hinge member 621 Upper hinge body 622 Body frame upper hinge pin 623 Door frame upper hinge hole 640 Body frame side lower Hinge member 641 Lower hinge first main body 643 Lower hinge second main body 644 Door frame hinge hole 645 Control piece 660 Reinforcing frame 661 Left positioning member 680 Ball launching device 681 Launching base 682 Launching solenoid 683 Hitting mallet 684 Launching rail 700 Locking unit 701 Unit base 702 Door frame hook 703 Outer frame hook 710 Key cylinder 784 External terminal board 800 Dispensing unit 801 Dispensing unit base 802 Ball tank 803 Tank rail 804 Ball leveling member 820 Ball guiding unit 821 Front case 821a Ball guiding inlet 821b Ball Guide outlet 821c Guide passage 821d Introductory part 821e Detecting part 821f Meandering part 821g Notch part 822 Rear case 822a Ball guide inlet 822b Ball guide outlet 822c Guide passage 822d Introducing part 822e Detecting part 822f Meandering part 8 8g Cutout part 822g Movable piece member front 825a Movable piece 825b Shaft hole 825c Extending portion 825d Connecting portion 825e Weight attaching portion 825f Detecting piece 825g Stopper piece 826 Movable piece member rear 826a Movable piece 826b Shaft hole 826c Extending portion 826d Fie attaching portion 826e Detection piece 826g Stopper piece 827 Ball breakage detection sensor 830 Discharge device 831 Front box 831a Discharge entrance 831b Discharge exit 831c Ball discharge exit 831d Discharge passage 831e Ball discharge passage 831f Guide shelf 831g Lever mounting portion 832 Rear box exit 832a Discharge 832a Ball outlet 832d Delivery passage 832e Ball passage 832f Guide shelf 832g Lever mounting part 833 Front Cover 834 Discharge motor 835 Drive gear 836 Intermediate gear 837 Driven gear 837a Gear part 837b Detecting piece 837c Connecting part 838 Shaft member 839 Discharge blade 839a Base cylinder part 839b Front blade 839c Rear blade 839d Connected part 839e Ball rotating part 839e Sensor 841 Partition plate 842 Discharge detection sensor 843 Ball removal movable piece 843a Main body 843b Shaft cylinder 843c Projection 843d Weight attachment 844 Ball removal lever 850 Upper full ball path unit 850a Upper delivery ball receiving port 850b Upper ball removal inlet 850c Upper ball storage passage 850d Normal discharge port 850e Full tank discharge port 850f Partition 850g Upper ball discharge passage 850h Upper ball discharge outlet 851 Upper full tank base 852 Upper full tank cover 853 Discharging device pressing member 854 Back cover mounting part 860 Lower full tank ball Route unit 860b Error LED indicator 869 Game ball lending device connection terminal plate 861 Normal taxiway 862 Full tank taxiway 863 Taxiway opening/closing door 863a Base part 863b First door plate part 863c Second door plate part 863d Extending part 863e Operation Protrusion 864 Closing spring 865 Lower ball removal guideway 866 Upper case 867 Lower case 867a Boss part 868 Frame peripheral relay terminal plate 869 Game ball ball lending device connection terminal plate 870 Guideway opening/closing door 870a Base part 870b First door plate part 870c Second door plate portion 870d Recessed portion 870e Operating protrusion 880 Main door relay terminal plate 882 Peripheral door relay terminal plate 900 Board unit 910 Board unit base 911 Door frame relay board 920 Speaker unit 921 Speaker 930 Power board box 934 Power switch 931 Power supply Substrate 935 Power supply control unit 935a Synchronous rectification circuit 935b Power factor improvement circuit 935c Smoothing circuit 935d Power supply creation circuit 940 Interface control board box 950 Discharge control board box 951 Discharge control board 951a Discharge control filter circuit 952 Discharge control unit 952a Discharge control MPU
952b Discharge control input circuit 952c Discharge control output circuit 952d Discharge motor drive circuit 952da Voltage switching circuit 952e CR unit input/output circuit 953 Fire control section 953a Fire control circuit 954 Operation switch 980 Back cover 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guide part 1004 Lower right rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Stop part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Security recess 1009 Positioning protrusion 1010 Mounting boss 1011 Notch 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1111 Out recess 1112 Opening 1113 Fitting hole 1114 Long hole 1115 Engagement step portion 1116 Inner rail fixing hole 1120 Panel holder 1121 Holding step portion 1122 Through hole 1123 Projecting pin 1124 Engaging claw 1125 Engaging piece 1126 Out port 1127 Notch portion 1128 Mounting hole 1129 Inserting hole 1150 Game panel (second embodiment) )
1151 Out port 1152 Notch part 1153 Insertion hole 1154 Inner rail fixing hole 1155 Mounting hole 1200 Board holder 1201 Discharge part 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1310a Main control MPU
1310aa main control CPU core 1310ae main circumference serial transmission port 1310aea transmission shift register 1310aeb transmission buffer register 1310aec serial management unit 1310af WDT
1310an Hard random number circuit 1310b Main control input circuit 1310c Main control output circuit 1310ca Main control output circuit with reset function 1310cb No reset function Main control output circuit 1310d Main control solenoid drive circuit 1310e Power failure monitoring circuit 1300g +5V creation circuit 1300h Main control filter circuit 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1401 Status indicator 1402 Normal symbol indicator 1403 First special symbol indicator 1404 First special reserved number indicator 1405 Second special symbol indicator 1406 Second special reserved number indicator 1407 Round display Unit 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1510b +3.3V creation circuit 1511 Peripheral control unit 1511a Peripheral control MPU
1511aa peripheral control CPU core 1511ab peripheral control built-in RAM
1511ac Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ad Peripheral control Bus controller 1511ae Peripheral control Various serial I/O ports 1511af Peripheral control built-in WDT
1511ag Peripheral control Various parallel I/O ports 1511ak Peripheral control A/D converter 1511ai Peripheral bus 1511ah Internal bus 1511b Peripheral control ROM
1511c Peripheral control RAM
1511d Peripheral control SRAM
1511e Peripheral control external WDT
1511h External bus 1512 Liquid crystal display control unit 1512a Internal sound source VDP
1512b Liquid crystal and sound control ROM
1512c Audio data transmission IC
1512d Transmitter IC for door frame side effect
1512e Differential circuit 1512f Forced switching circuit 1520 Peripheral control board box 1600 Game board side effect display device 1600a Liquid crystal module 1600b Backlight power supply 1601 Left fixing piece 1602 Right fixing piece 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning opening 2002a First left starting opening 2002b 1st right starting opening 2003 Gate part 2004 2nd starting opening 2005 1st big winning opening 2005b 2nd big winning opening 2011 Sorting member 2012 1st passage 2013 2nd passage inlet 2014 2nd passage 2015 2nd passage outlet 2016 Inlet 2017 Clune 2021 Constant Drive Door 2022 Second Starting Door 2107 Constant Driving Solenoid 2108 Second Starting Door Solenoid 2109 First Attacker Solenoid 2110 Second Attacker Solenoid 2200 Side Unit Lower 2300 Side Unit Upper 2400 V Winner 2410 Rotating Body 2411 V Winner Port 2412 Discharge port 2500 Center accessory 2520 Warp inlet 2522 Warp outlet 2530 Stage 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3010a Opening 3010b Liquid crystal mounting part 3010c Fixing groove 3010d Cutout 3010e Fixing piece part 3042 Performance drive board box unit 3050 Back left unit 3100 Back lower back movable production unit 3200 Back upper left movable production unit 3300 Back left movable production unit 3400 Back upper middle movable production unit 3500 Back lower front movable production unit 4002a First left starting opening sensor 4002b First right starting opening sensor 4003 Gate Sensor 4004 Second start opening sensor 4005a First count sensor 4005b Second count sensor 4007a First V winning opening sensor 4007b Second V winning opening sensor 4008 Discharge opening sensor 4020 General winning opening sensor 4024 Magnetic detection sensor 4161 Panel relay board 4162 Sensor Signal input unit 4163 Voltage output unit 4164 Detection circuit unit 4165 RTC control unit 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4166 Voltage raising part 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board 4450 Production display drive board 4450v Liquid crystal module circuit 4450x Door frame side production module power supply circuit 4450y Door frame side production module Back light power circuit MGS Magnetic sensor STR Transistor (built-in type)
ZD0 Zener diode CON1 connector RR Contact resistance CNO2 connector

Claims (1)

First lottery information acquisition means for acquiring first lottery information based on establishment of the first start condition,
Second lottery information acquisition means for acquiring second lottery information based on the establishment of the second starting condition,
Determination means for making a determination based on the first lottery information and the second lottery information,
When it is determined to be a predetermined hit by the determination means, a profit granting state control means capable of controlling to a profit granting state different from the normal game state,
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a symbol changing means for changing the symbol,
Based on the first lottery information or the second lottery information, a symbol variation time determination means for determining a symbol variation time for varying the symbol,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the storage period generating means for generating a storing period the symbol variation time determined based on said first lottery information,
And storing probability improved means for enhancing the establishment potential of the storage conditions than normal in the reservoir period,
Storage means for storing the second lottery information acquired by the second lottery information acquisition means , based on the establishment of the storage condition ,
When the profitable state is controlled based on the second lottery information after the storageable period generated by the storageable period generating means, the storageable period is controlled again after the profitable state ends. gaming machine equal to an Rukoto.